Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

19 total
1

How do I remove the top protective cover from drive models 2011 to 2169 and 4156?

To remove the top protective cover, put the end of a straight-edge screwdriver into the small hole on the front edge of the cover and apply pressure carefully to remove it. Ensure that all necessary steps for moving or reattaching covers are followed safely (Page 19).

2

What is the procedure to use a crane or hoist to move an Hv600 drive?

Prevent more than 1.96 m/s2 (0.2 G) vibration or impact when lifting the drive using a crane or hoist during installation or removal; also avoid turning the drive over or ignoring suspended drives as this may cause serious injury or death (Page 15).

3

How do I reattach terminal covers on an Hv600 drive after moving them for inspection?

Before reconnecting the terminal cover, make sure that wires and signal lines are not pinched between the cover and the drive. Then tighten any loosened screws to a torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in). Follow similar steps for reattaching front covers, ensuring correct alignment and clicking of hooks into position (Page 21-23).

4

What safety precautions should I follow when working on the main circuit terminals of an Hv600 drive?

De-energize the drive and wait at least 5 minutes until the Charge LED turns off before removing the front cover to work on wiring, circuit boards, and other components. Ensure all connections are correct for their intended purpose to prevent electrical shock or injury (Page 29).

5

How do I perform Auto-Tuning correctly without causing harm?

Before Auto-Tuning, ensure no one is near the drive and remove any personnel from the area around the motor and load. This prevents potential sudden movement during tuning that could lead to serious injury or death (Page 37).

6

How do I install an EMC filter correctly with an Hv600 drive?

Properly ground the neutral point on the power supply before turning on the EMC filter switch to comply with the EMC Directive and ensure safety against electrical shock hazards (Page 9).

Show 13 more questions

Full Manual

126 pages
Page 1

HV600 DRIVE

INSTALLATION & PRIMARY OPERATION

AC DRIVE FOR HVAC FAN AND PUMP APPLICATIONS

CATALOG CODE: HV60Uxxxxxxx CAPACITIES:

208 V class: 2.2 to 75 kW (3 to 100 HP) 480 V class: 2.2 to 186 kW (3 to 250 HP)

PDF yaskawa.com/TOEPC71061732

![image 1](getAttachment_images/imageFile1.png)

![image 2](getAttachment_images/imageFile2.png)

DOCUMENT NUMBER: TOEPC71061732

####### This Page Intentionally Blank

Table of Contents

  • 1. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
  • 2. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Explanation of Signal Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 General Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Exclusion of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
  • 3. Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
  • 4. Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
  • How to Read Catalog Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Rated Output Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

  • 5. Common Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Area of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
  • 6. Mechanical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Moving the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Installation Position and Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
  • Single Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Side-by-Side Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installing More than One Drive Adjacent to Each Other without Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remove the Top Protective Cover: 2011 to 2114, 4005 to 4052, and 4077 to 4124 . . . . 18 Remove the Top Protective Cover: 2143, 2169, and 4156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

    Removing/Reattaching Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

  • Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
  • Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
  • Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Opening/Closing the Door Using Procedure D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
  • Page 2

  • 7. Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
  • Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

    Standard Drive Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Motor and Main Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

    Wiring the Main Circuit and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

    ########## Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Wire Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

    Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block of Models 2011 to 2059 and 4005 to 4065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block of Models 2075 to 2114 and 4077 to 4124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
  • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
  • 8. Keypad: Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 AUTO LED and HAND LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Keypad Mode and Menu Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
  • 9. LED Status Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
  • 10.Drive Start-Up Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Change Parameter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Disable the Initial Setup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
  • Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 External Power Supply Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Serial Communication Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

    Control Circuit Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

    Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Control I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

    Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Set Input Signals for MFAI Terminals A1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Set Output Signals for MFAO Terminals FM, AM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Switch ON Termination Resistor for RS-485 Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

  • 11. Drive Control and Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Selecting the Control Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
  • 12.UL Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Area of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ferrules and Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Short Circuit Protection Requirements for UL Listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
  • UL Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

    ########## Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

    Page 3

    E2-01: Motor Rated Current (FLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 E5-03: PM Motor Rated Current (FLA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 E9-06: Motor Rated Current (FLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

  • L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
  • L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
  • L1-03: Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
  • L1-04: Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
  • 13.European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
  • Area of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Guarding Against Debris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Connect a Fuse and a GFCI to the Input Side (Primary Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

    EMC Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Install a Drive to Conform to the EMC Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

  • 14.China RoHS Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
  • 15.对应中国RoHS指令 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 本产品中含有有害物质的信息 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
  • 16.Safe Disable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Safe Disable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Using the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
  • Safe Disable Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Enabling and Disabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Validating the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

  • 17.Seismic Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
  • 18.Disposal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
  • 19.Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
  • 20.Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Minor Faults/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parameter Setting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
  • ###### Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

  • 1 General Information
  • #### 1 General Information

    The products and specifications given in this manual and the manual contents can change without notice to make the product and manual better. Be sure to always use the latest version of this manual. Use this manual to correctly install, wire, set, and operate this product. Users can download additional manuals for this product from the Yaskawa documentation website printed on the back cover.

    ◆ Glossary

    |Phrase|Definition| |---|---| |Drive|YASKAWA AC Drive HV600|

    Page 4

    |EDM|External Device Monitor| |EZOLV|EZ Open Loop Vector Control| |IPM motor|Interior Permanent Magnet motors| |MFAI|Multi-Function Analog Input| |MFAO|Multi-Function Analog Output| |MFDI|Multi-Function Digital Input| |MFDO|Multi-Function Digital Output| |OLV/PM|Open Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors| |PM motor|Permanent Magnet Synchronous motor (generic name for IPM motors and SPM motors)| |SIL|Safety Integrity Level| |SPM motor|Surface Permanent Magnet motors| |V/f|V/f Control|

    #### 2 Safety

    Read the safety instructions carefully before you install, wire, or operate this product.

    ##### ◆ Explanation of Signal Words

    DANGER This signal word identifies a hazard that will cause serious injury or death if you do not prevent it. WARNING This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause death or serious injuries if you do not prevent it. CAUTION This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause minor or moderate injuries if you do not prevent it.

    NOTICE This signal word identifies a property damage message that is not related to personal injury.

    ##### ◆ General Safety Instructions

    Yaskawa Electric manufactures and supplies electronic components for a variety of industrial applications. The selection and application of Yaskawa products is the responsibility of the designer of the equipment or the customer who assembles the final product. Yaskawa is not responsible for how our products are incorporated into the final system design. In all cases, Yaskawa products should not be incorporated into a product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control function. All control functions are designed to dynamically detect failures and operate safely without exception. All products that are designed to incorporate parts manufactured by Yaskawa must be provided to the end user and include proper warnings and instructions regarding their safe use and operation. All warnings from Yaskawa must be promptly issued to the end user. Yaskawa offers warranties only for the quality of our products, in compliance with standards and specifications that are described in the manual. Yaskawa does not offer other warranties, either explicit or implied. Injuries, property damage, and lost business opportunities caused by improper

    2 Safety

    storage or handling and negligence oversight on the part of your company or your customers will void Yaskawa's warranty for the product.

    Note:

    If you do not obey the safety messages in the manual, you are at risk for serious injury or death. Yaskawa is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment if you ignore the safety messages.

  • •Read this manual carefully when you install, operate, or repair AC drives.
  • •Obey all warnings, cautions, and notices.
  • •Approved personnel must do all work.
  • •Install the drive as specified by this manual and local codes.
  • Page 5

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Do not connect main power supply wiring to drive motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Connect main power supply wiring to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death from fire.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry. Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. Only approved personnel can operate a crane or hoist to move the drive. If unapproved personnel operate a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal. If you do not ground the equipment correctly, it can cause serious injury or death if you touch the motor case.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings. Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. The IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically deenergize when the protective ground wire disconnects. You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum crosssectional area of 10mm2 (copper wire) or 16 mm2 (aluminum wire). For drive models on which you cannot use a protective ground wire of 10 mm2 or more, install two protective ground wires that have the same cross-sectional area. If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death. The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Auto-Tuning, remove all personnel and objects from the area around the drive, motor, and load. The drive and motor can start suddenly during Auto-Tuning and cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Remove all personnel and objects from the area around the drive, motor, and machine and attach covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before you energize the drive. If personnel are too close or if there are missing parts, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Damage to Equipment. Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate. Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material. Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque. Connections that are too loose or too

    tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Tighten screws at an angle in the specified range shown in this manual. If you tighten the screws at an angle not in the specified range, you can have loose connections that can cause damage to the terminal block or start a fire and cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. Use a crane or hoist to move large drives when necessary. If you try to move a large drive without a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not cause a short circuit on the drive output circuit. A short circuit on the output can cause serious injury or death.

  • 2 Safety
  • WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Correctly do inspection and maintenance. If you do not do inspection or maintenance, the deteriorated internal components of the drive can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. When there is a DC component in the protective earthing conductor, the drive can cause a residual current. When a residual current operated protective or monitoring device prevents direct or indirect contact, always use a type B Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) as specified by IEC/EN 60755. If you do not use the correct GFCI, it can cause serious injury or death.

    Page 6

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of the drives to comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter. If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set parameters. If you do not test the system, it can cause damage to equipment or serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. After the drive blows a fuse or trips a GFCI, do not immediately energize the drive or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. Prevent the drive from too much vibration or impact. Too much vibration or impact can cause serious injury from the damaged equipments.

    WARNING Arc Flash Hazard. Obey local codes and Arc Flash safety requirements contained in the Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace NFPA 70E (2009 Edition or later) and the Workplace Electrical Safety, Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Z462-12. Obey safe work procedures and use applicable personal protective equipment (PPE). If you do not obey these requirements and procedures, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this manual. The drive is suitable for circuits that supply not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (208 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (480 V Class). Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.

    CAUTION Crush Hazard. Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive. If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

    CAUTION Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans. If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures. If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.

    NOTICE Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is outputting voltage. Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not do a withstand voltage test or use a megohmmeter or megger insulation tester on the drive. These tests can cause damage to the drive.

    NOTICE Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts. You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

    NOTICE Install branch circuit protection, for example fuses or ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs) as specified in the drive instructions. If you do not install these components, it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

    NOTICE Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

    NOTICE Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral devices. Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.

    NOTICE Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters, or leakage breakers (GFCI) to the motor circuit. If you connect these devices to the output circuits, it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

    NOTICE Use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation and windings applicable for use with an AC drive. If the motor does not have the correct insulation, it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation deterioration.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.

    ############## Note:

    Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

    Page 7

    3 Cybersecurity

    ##### ◆ Exclusion of Liability

  • • This product is not designed and manufactured for use in life-support machines or systems.
  • • Contact a Yaskawa representative or your Yaskawa sales representative if you are considering the application of this product for special purposes, such as machines or systems used for passenger cars, medicine, airplanes and aerospace, nuclear power, electric power, or undersea relaying.
  • WARNING Injury to Personnel. When you use this product in applications where its failure could cause the loss of human life, a serious accident, or physical injury, you must install applicable safety devices. If you do not correctly install safety devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

    #### 3 Cybersecurity

    This product is designed to connect and communicate information and data through a network interface. It is the sole responsibility of the customer to provide and continuously guarantee a secure connection between the product and the customer's network or if applicable, any other network. The customer must establish and maintain the appropriate measures (such as, but not limited to, the installation of firewalls, the application of authentication measures, the encryption of data, the installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against all types of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. Yaskawa and its affiliates are not responsible for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.

    #### 4 Receiving

  • 1. Examine the product for damage and missing parts. Immediately contact the shipping company if the drive is damaged. The Yaskawa warranty does not cover damage from shipping.
  • 2. Verify the catalog code in the “C/C” section of the drive nameplate to make sure that you received the correct model.
  • 3. If you did not receive the correct drive or if your drive does not operate correctly, contact your supplier.
  • 4. Examine each drive and each motor for systems that use more than one drive. NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not install or use damaged parts or damaged motors into the drive system.
  • 4 Receiving

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 8

    | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

  • A - Weight
  • B - Drive software version
  • C - The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation
  • D - Accreditation standards
  • E - Surrounding air temperature
  • F - Protection design Figure 4.1 Nameplate Example
  • G - Serial number
  • H - Lot number
  • I - Output specifications
  • J - Input specifications
  • K - Catalog code
  • ◆ How to Read Catalog Codes Use the information in Figure 4.2 and Table 4.1 to read the drive catalog codes.

    Figure 4.2 Drive Catalog Code Table 4.1 Catalog Code Details

    |No.|Description| |---|---|

    Page 9

    |1|Product series| |2|Region code U: the Americas| |3|Input power supply voltage

    • 2: Three-Phase 200 Vac to 240 Vac
    • 4: Three-Phase 380 Vac to 480 Vac
    | |4|Rated output current Note: Refer to the rated output current list for more information.|

    4 Receiving

    |No.|Description| |---|---| |5|EMC filter C: Built-in EMC filter for C2| |6|Protection design

    • B: IP20/UL Open Type
    • F: IP20/ULType 1
    • V: IP55/ULType 12
    | |7|Environmental specification A: Standard|

    ■ Rated Output Current Table 4.2 and Table 4.3 give the rated output current values.

    Note:

  • •These output current values are applicable for drives that operate at standard specifications.
  • •Derate the current in applications that:
  • –Increase the carrier frequency
  • –Have high ambient temperature
  • –Use side-by-side installation.
  • Table 4.2 Output Current for Three-Phase AC 208 V Class Models (NEMA Rating)
  • Table 4.3 Output Current for Three-Phase AC 480 V Class Models (NEMA Rating)
  • |Model|Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW (HP)|Rated Output Current A| |---|---|---| |2011|2.2 (3)|10.6| |2017|3.7 (5)|16.7| |2024|5.5 (7.5)|24.2| |2031|7.5 (10)|30.8| |2046|11 (15)|46.2| |2059|15 (20)|59.4| |2075|18.5 (25)|74.8|

    Page 10

    |2088|22 (30)|88| |2114|30 (40)|114| |2143|37 (50)|143| |2169|45 (60)|169| |2211|55 (75)|211| |2273|75 (100)|273|

    |Model|Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW (HP)|Rated Output Current A| |---|---|---| |4005|2.2 (3)|4.8| |4008|3.7 (5)|7.6| |4011|5.6 (7.5)|11| |4014|7.5 (10)|14| |4021|11.2 (15)|21| |4027|15 (20)|27| |4034|18.6 (25)|34| |4040|22 (30)|40| |4052|30 (40)|52| |4065|37 (50)|65| |4077|45 (60)|77|

    5 Common Drive Specifications

    |Model|Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW (HP)|Rated Output Current A| |---|---|---| |4096|56 (75)|96| |4124|75 (100)|124| |4156|93 (125)|156| |4180|112 (150)|180| |4240|150 (200)|240| |4302|186 (250)|302|

    #### 5 Common Drive Specifications

    Note: To get the longest product life, install the drive in an environment that meets the necessary specifications.

    Table 5.1 Control Characteristics

    Page 11

    |Item|Specification| |---|---| |Control Methods|• V/f Control (V/f)
    • PM Open Loop Vector Control (OLV/PM)
    • EZ Open Loop Vector Control (EZOLV)
    | |Frequency Control Range|• EZOLV: 0.01 Hz to 120 Hz
    • V/f and OLV/PM: 0.01 Hz to 400 Hz
    | |Frequency Accuracy (Temperature Fluctuation)|Digital inputs: Within ±0.01% of the maximum output frequency (-10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)) Analog inputs: Within ±0.1% of the maximum output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C (77 °F ±18 °F))| |Frequency Setting Resolution|Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output frequency (11-bit)| |Output Frequency Resolution|0.001 Hz| |Frequency Setting Signal|Main speed frequency reference: 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω)| |Starting Torque|• V/f: 140%/3 Hz
    • OLV/PM: 100%/10% speed
    • EZOLV: 100%/10% speed
    | |Speed Control Range|• For Induction Motors:

    – V/f: 1:40
    – EZOLV: 1:10


    • For Permanent Magnet Motors and Synchronous Reluctance Motors:


    – OLV/PM: 1:20
    – EZOLV: 1:10
    | |Torque Limits|Parameter settings allow different limits in four quadrants in EZOLV control method.| |Accel/Decel Time|0.1 s to 6000.0 s The drive can set two pairs of different acceleration and deceleration times.| |V/f Characteristics|Select from 15 pre-defined V/f patterns, or a user-set V/f pattern.| |Main Control Functions|Restart After Momentary Power Loss, Speed Search, Overtorque/Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, 9 Step Speed (max.), Accel/Decel Switch, S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration, 3-wire Sequence, Auto-Tuning (Rotational and Stationary), Cooling Fan ON/OFF Switch, Slip Compensation, Torque Compensation, Jump Frequency, Upper/Lower Limits for Frequency Reference, DC Injection Braking at Start and Stop, Overexcitation Braking, High Slip Braking, PID Control (with Sleep Function), Energy Saving Control, APOGEE FLN Communication (RS-485 4.8 kbps), BACnet Communication (RS-485 max. 76.8 kbps), MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication (RS-485 max. 115.2 kbps), Metasys N2 Communication (RS-485 9.6 kbps), Auto Restart, Application Presets, DriveWorksEZ (customized functions), KEB, Overexcitation Deceleration, Overvoltage Suppression|

    Table 5.2 Protection Functions

    |Item|Specification| |---|---| |Motor Protection|Electronic thermal overload protection| |Momentary Overcurrent Protection|Drive stops when the output current is more than 175% of the drive rated output current.|

    5 Common Drive Specifications

    |Item|Specification| |---|---| |Overload Protection|Drive stops when the output current is more than these overload tolerances:

    • 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds
    • 140% of the rated output current for 2.5 seconds when the drive output frequency is 3 Hz The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.


    Note: If output frequency < 6 Hz, the drive can trigger the overload protection function when the output current is in the overload tolerance range.| |Overvoltage Protection|208 V class: Stops when the DC bus voltage is more than approximately 410 V 480 V class: Stops when the DC bus voltage is more than approximately 820 V| |Undervoltage Protection|208 V class: Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 190 V 480 V class:

    • Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 350 V when you use an input voltage less than 400 V
    • Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 380 V when you use an input voltage less than 460 V
    • Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 440 V when you use an input voltage of 460 Vor more
    | |Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru|Immediately stops when power loss is 15 ms or longer. Continues operation if power loss is shorter than 2 s (depending on parameter settings).

    Note: Stop time may be shortened depending on the load and motor speed.| |Heatsink Overheat Protection|The drive stops when the thermistor detects an IGBT temperature more than approximately 100 °C (212 °F). The trip temperature level is different for different drive models.| |Stall Prevention|Stall prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run.| |Ground Fault Protection|Electronic circuit protection Note: This protection detects ground faults during run. The drive will not provide protection when:

    • There is a low-resistance ground fault for the motor cable or terminal block
    • Energizing the drive when there is a ground fault.
    | |DC Bus Charge LED|Charge LED illuminates when DC bus voltage is more than 50 V.|

    Table 5.3 Environment

    |Item|Specification|

    Page 12

    |---|---| |Area of Use|Indoors| |Power Supply|Overvoltage Category III| |Ambient Temperature Setting|IP20/ULType 1 and IP55/ULType 12: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F) IP20/UL Open Type/Heatsink External Mounting: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)

    • When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range.
    • Do not let the drive freeze.
    • You can use IP20/UL Open Type and IP20/ULType 1 drives at a maximum of 60 °C (140 °F) when you derate the output current.
    • You can use IP55/ULType 12 drives at a maximum of 50 °C (122 °F) when you derate the output current.
    | |Humidity|95% RH or less Do not let condensation form on the drive.| |Storage Temperature|-20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) (short-term temperature during transportation)| |Surrounding Area|Pollution degree 2 or less Install the drive in an area without:

    • Oil mist, corrosive or flammable gas, or dust
    • Metal powder, oil, water, or other unwanted materials
    • Radioactive materials or flammable materials, including wood
    • Harmful gas or fluids
    • Salt
    • Direct sunlight
    | |Altitude|1000 m (3281 ft) maximum Note: Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m (3281 ft to 13123 ft). It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:

    • When you install the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
    • When you install the drive between 2000 m to 4000 m (6562 ft to 13123 ft) and ground the neutral point on the power supply.
    | |Vibration|• 10 Hz to 20 Hz: 1 G (9.8 m/s2, 32.15 ft/s2)
    • 20 Hz to 55 Hz: 2011 to 2031, 4005 to 4034: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2) 2046 to 2273, 4040 to 4302: 0.2 G (1.96 m/s2, 6.43 ft/s2)
    | |Installation Orientation|Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.|

    ############## Table 5.4 Certifications and Standard Compliance

    |Item|Specification| |---|---| |UL/cUL|UL 508C *1| |CE Low Voltage Directive

    2014/35/EU|IEC/EN 61800-5-1| |CE EMC Directive 2014/30/EU|EN 61800-3| |CE Machinery Directive

    2006/42/EC|• IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3)
    • IEC/EN 62061 (SIL3)
    • EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e, Cat.3)
    | |RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU|-| |WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU|-|

    *1 Models 2143xV, 2169xV, and 4156xVare compatible with UL61800-5-1.

    Table 5.5 Enclosure Ratings

    |Item|Specification| |---|---| |Protection Design|IP20/UL Open Type IP20/ULType 1 IP55/ULType 12

    Note: Install a UL Type 1 kit on an IP20/UL Open Type drive to convert the drive to an IP20/ULType 1.|

    ◆ Area of Use Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less.

    ■ Ambient Temperature Setting Maintain the ambient temperature within the following ranges according to the enclosure type.

  • • IP20/ULType 1 and IP55/ULType 12: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
  • • IP20/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
  • Page 13

    #### 6 Mechanical Installation

    This section gives information about the standard environment for correct installation.

    ◆ Moving the Drive Obey local laws and regulations when moving and installing this product.

    CAUTION Crush Hazard. Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive. If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

    |Drive Weight|Persons Necessary to Move the Drive| |---|---| |< 15 kg (33 lbs.)|1| |≥ 15 kg (33 lbs.)|2 + using appropriate lifting equipment|

    Refer to the Technical Reference for information about how to use suspension systems, wires, or hanging metal brackets to move the drive.

    ##### ◆ Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive

    Use the hanging brackets attached to the drive to temporarily lift the drive when you install the drive to a control panel or wall or when you replace the drive. Do not let the drive stay vertically or horizontally suspended or move the drive over a long distance while it is suspended.

    Before you install the drive, make sure that you read these precautions:

    WARNING Crush Hazard. Before you hang the drive vertically, use screws to correctly attach the drive front cover and other drive components. If you do not secure the front cover, it can fall and cause minor injury.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. When you use a crane or hoist to lift the drive during installation or removal, prevent more than 1.96 m/s2 (0.2 G) vibration or impact. Too much vibration or impact can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. When you lift the drive during installation or removal, do not try to turn the drive over and do not ignore the hanging drive. If you move a hanging drive too much or if you ignore it, the drive can fall and cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Crush Hazard. When you install the drive, do not hold the front cover. Install the drive with holding the heatsink. If you hold the front cover, the cover will come off and the drive will fall, then it can cause injury.

    ◆ Installation Position and Distance Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.

    A - Vertical installation B - Horizontal installation Figure 6.1 Installation Position

    ##### ■ Single Drive Installation

    Use the clearances specified in Figure 6.2 to install the drive. Make sure that there is sufficient space for wiring and airflow.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Remove the top protective cover from the drive when you install IP20/UL Type 1 models 2011 to 2169, 4005 to 4052, and 4077 to 4156 in an enclosure or when you install the drive with the heatsink external to the enclosure. If you do not remove the cover, the drive temperature will increase and it can cause damage to the drive.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not remove the top protective cover of model 4065. If you remove the cover, the drive temperature will increase and it can cause damage to the drive.

    Page 14

    ############## Note:

    When you install models 2011 to 2169 and 4005 to 4156 in an enclosure or when you install the drive with the heatsink external to the enclosure, set L8-35 = 0 [Installation Method Selection = IP20/UL Open Type].

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum B - 30 mm (1.2 in) minimum *1

    C - 120 mm (4.7 in) minimum *2 D - Airflow direction

    Figure 6.2 Single Drive Installation Distances

  • *1 For IP55/ULType 12 enclosure drives, 50 mm (2 in) minimum is necessary to remove the front cover.
  • *2 This is the distance from a drive component or mounting bracket that has the maximum height. The highest component of the drive is
  • different for different models. ■ Side-by-Side Installation Side-by-Side Installation lets you install more than one drive in the minimum mounting space. This method helps you to use and set up a more compact control panel. You can install drive models 2011 to 2114 and 4005 to 4124 side-by-side at ambient temperature 40 °C (104 °F).

    Note: You cannot install the drives that have IP55/ULType 12 protection level side-by-side.

    When you install IP20/ULType 1 models 2011 to 2114 and 4005 to 4124 side-by-side:

  • • Use the clearances specified in Figure 6.3. Make sure that there is sufficient space.
  • • Set L8-35 = 1 [Installation Method Selection = Side-by-Side Mounting].
  • • Set the derating for the ambient temperature.
  • NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Remove the top protective covers from all drives when you install IP20/UL Type 1 models 2011 to 2114, 4005 to 4052, and 4077 to 4124 side-by-side. If you do not remove the covers, the drive temperature will increase and it can cause damage to the drives.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not remove the top protective cover of model 4065. If you remove the cover, the drive temperature will increase and it can cause damage to the drive.

  • A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum
  • Page 15

  • B - 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum
  • C - 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum
  • D - 300 mm (11.8 in) minimum
  • E - 120 mm (4.7 in) minimum
  • Figure 6.3 Installation Distances for More than One Drive (Side-by-Side)

    Note: Align the tops of drives that have different dimensions to help when you replace cooling fans.

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 6.4 IP20/UL Type 1 Drives Installed Side-by-Side

    ##### ■ Installing More than One Drive Adjacent to Each Other without Derating Use the clearances specified in Figure 6.5. Make sure that there is sufficient space.

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 16

    A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum B - 30 mm (1.2 in) minimum

    C - 60 mm (2.4 in) minimum D - 120 mm (4.7 in) minimum

    Figure 6.5 Installation Distances for More than One Drive without Derating

    Note: Align the tops of drives that have different dimensions to help when you replace cooling fans.

    ##### ■ Remove the Top Protective Cover: 2011 to 2114, 4005 to 4052, and 4077 to 4124

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not remove the top protective cover of model 4065. If you remove the cover, the drive temperature will increase and it can cause damage to the drive.

    Put the end of a straight-edge screwdriver into the small hole on the front edge of the top protective cover, then carefully apply pressure to remove the cover from the drive.

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 6.6 Remove the Top Protective Cover (2011 to 2114, 4005 to 4052, and 4077 to 4124)

    ##### ■ Remove the Top Protective Cover: 2143, 2169, and 4156

    Remove the screws to remove the top protective cover from the drive.

    Figure 6.7 Remove the Top Protective Cover (2143, 2169, and 4156)

    ◆ Removing/Reattaching Covers This section gives information about how to remove and reattach the front cover and terminal cover for wiring and inspection. Different drive models have different procedures to remove and reattach the covers. Refer to Table 6.1 for more information.

    Table 6.1 Procedures to Remove Covers by Drive Model

    Page 17

    |Model|IP20/UL Type 1 and IP20/UL Open Type|IP20/UL Type 1 and IP20/UL Open Type|IP55/UL Type 12|IP55/UL Type 12| |---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Procedure|Reference|Procedure|Reference| |2011 - 2114 4005 - 4096|Procedure A|19|Procedure C|23| |4124|Procedure A|19|Procedure C|23| |2143 - 2169 4156|Procedure B|21|Procedure D|26| |2211 - 2273 4180 - 4302|Procedure B|21|-|-|

    ##### ■ Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure A

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    ############# Remove the Front Cover

  • 1. Remove the keypad from the drive.
  • A - Keypad

    Figure 6.8 Remove the Keypad

  • 2. Loosen the front cover screw.
  • Figure 6.9 Loosen the Front Cover Screw
  • Push on the tabs in the sides of the front cover then pull the front cover forward to remove it from the drive.
  • Figure 6.10 Remove the Front Cover
  • ############# Reattach the Front Cover

  • 1. Wire the drive and other peripheral devices.
  • 2. Reverse the steps to reattach the cover.
  • Note:

    Page 18

  • •Make sure that you did not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
  • •Make sure that the tabs on the sides of the front cover correctly click into the hook.
  • •Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in).
  • | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 6.11 Reattach the Front Cover

  • Reattach the keypad to its initial position.
  • ##### ■ Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    ############# Remove the Terminal Cover

  • 1. Loosen the screws on the terminal cover, then pull down on the cover.
  • CAUTION Crush Hazard. Loosen the cover screws. Do not fully remove them. If you fully remove the cover screws, the terminal cover can fall and cause moderate injury.

    Figure 6.12 Loosen the Terminal Cover Mounting Screws

  • 2. Pull the terminal cover away from the drive.
  • Figure 6.13 Remove the Terminal Cover

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Page 19

    ############# Remove the Front Cover

  • 1. Remove the keypad from the drive.
  • A - Keypad

    Figure 6.14 Remove the Keypad

  • 2. Loosen the front cover screws.
  • Figure 6.15 Loosen the Front Cover Screws

  • 3. Pull part A of the front cover forward to remove the cover from the drive.
  • A - Pull forward to remove the front cover. Figure 6.16 Pull Forward to Remove the Front Cover

  • 4. Remove the front cover from the drive.
  • | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 6.17 Remove the Front Cover

    ############ Reattach the Front Cover Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the front cover.

    ######## 1. Move the front cover to connect the hooks at the top of the front cover to the drive.

    | | |

    Page 20

    |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - Hooks

    Figure 6.18 Reattach the Front Cover

    ######## 2. Move the front cover while pushing on the hooks on the left and right sides of the front cover until it clicks intoposition.

    Note: Make sure that you did not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.

    Figure 6.19 Reattach the Front Cover

  • Reattach the keypad to its initial position. Reattach the Terminal Cover
  • Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the terminal cover. Note:

  • •Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the wiring cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
  • •Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in).
  • | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 6.20 Reattach the Terminal Cover

    ##### ■ Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure C

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    ############# Remove the Front Cover

  • 1. Push in the two tabs on the right side of the IP55/ULType 12 keypad cover door and pull the door to the left to open.
  • Page 21

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not open the IP55/UL Type 12 keypad cover door too far. If you open the door too far, it will fall off.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. When the IP55/UL Type 12 keypad cover door is open, do not push the keypad key cover. If you push the keypad key cover, it will fall off.

    A - Tabs B - Keypad key cover Figure 6.21 Open the IP55/UL Type 12 Keypad Cover Door

  • 2. Remove the keypad from the drive.
  • A - Keypad

    Figure 6.22 Remove the Keypad

  • 3. Loosen the front cover screw.
  • | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Figure 6.23 Loosen the Front Cover Screw

  • Push in the tabs on the sides of the front cover and pull the front cover forward to remove it from the drive.
  • Figure 6.24 Remove the Front Cover Reattach the Front Cover

  • 1. Wire the drive and other peripheral devices.
  • 2. Reverse the steps to reattach the cover. Reattach the cover carefully and make sure that the gasket on the
  • conduit bracket does not twist. Note:

  • •Make sure that you did not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
  • •Make sure that the tabs on the sides of the front cover correctly click into the hook.
  • •Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in).
  • Figure 6.25 Reattach the Front Cover

  • Open the IP55/ULType 12 keypad cover door and reattach the keypad to its initial position, then close the
  • Page 22

    door until the two tabs click into position.

    Figure 6.26 Reattach the Keypad and Close the Keypad Cover Door

    ##### ■ Opening/Closing the Door Using Procedure D

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    ############# Open the Front Door

    Loosen the screws on the front door, then open the front door.

    Figure 6.27 Open the Front Door Remove the Keypad

  • 1. Push in the two tabs on the right side of the IP55/ULType 12 keypad cover door and pull the door to the left to open.
  • NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not open the IP55/UL Type 12 keypad cover door too far. If you open the door too far, it will fall off.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. When the IP55/UL Type 12 keypad cover door is open, do not push the keypad key cover. If you push the keypad key cover, it will fall off.

    A - Tabs B - Keypad key cover Figure 6.28 Open the IP55/UL Type 12 Keypad Cover Door

  • Remove the keypad from the drive.
  • A - Keypad

    Figure 6.29 Remove the Keypad Close the Front Door

  • Wire the drive and other peripheral devices.
  • 2. Open the IP55/ULType 12 keypad cover door and reattach the keypad to its initial position, then close the door until the two tabs click into position.
  • A - Keypad B - Keypad key cover

    C - Tabs

    Figure 6.30 Reattach the Keypad and Close the Door

  • 3. Reverse the steps to close the front door.
  • Page 23

    Figure 6.31 Close the Front Door Note:

  • •Make sure that you did not pinch fingers, wires or signal lines between the front door and the drive before you close the door.
  • •Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in).
  • #### 7 Electrical Installation

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. De-energize the drive and wait 5 minutes minimum until the Charge LED turns off. Remove the front cover and terminal cover to do work on wiring, circuit boards, and other parts. Use terminals for their correct function only. Incorrect wiring, incorrect ground connections, and incorrect repair of protective covers can cause death or serious injury.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Correctly ground the drive before you turn on the EMC filter switch. If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Use the terminals for the drive only for their intended purpose. Refer to the technical manual for more information about the I/O terminals. Wiring and grounding incorrectly or modifying the cover may damage the equipment or cause injury.

    ##### ◆ Standard Connection Diagram

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Set the MFDI parameters before you close control circuit switches. Incorrect Run/ Stop circuit sequence settings can cause serious injury or death from moving equipment.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire the start/stop and safety circuits before you energize the drive. If you momentarily close a digital input terminal, it can start a drive that is programmed for 3-Wire control and cause serious injury or death from moving equipment.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a 3-Wire sequence, set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-Wire Initialization] and make sure that b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN Command]. If you do not correctly set the drive parameters for 3-Wire operation before you energize the drive, the motor can suddenly rotate in reverse when you energize the drive.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Check the I/O signals and the external sequences for the drive before you set the Application Preset function. When you set the Application Preset function (A1-06 ≠ 0), it changes the I/O terminal functions for the drive and it can cause equipment to operate unusually. This can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this manual. The drive is suitable for circuits that supply not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (208 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (480 V Class). Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.

    NOTICE When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is longer than 100 m (328 ft), make sure that the motor insulation voltage is sufficient or use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation. Motor winding and insulation failure can occur.

    ############## Note:

    Do not connect the AC control circuit ground to the drive enclosure. Incorrect ground wiring can cause the control circuit to operate incorrectly.

    ##### ■ Standard Drive Connection Diagram

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 24

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    ############## Figure 7.1 Standard Drive Connection Diagram

  • *1 Set the wiring sequence to de-energize the drive with the fault relay output. If the drive outputs a fault during fault restart when you use the fault restart function, set L5-02 = 1 [Fault Contact at Restart Select = Always Active] to de-energize the drive. Be careful when you use a cut-off sequence. The default setting for L5-02 is 0 [Active Only when Not Restarting].
  • *2 Use branch circuit protection devices as recommended in this manual.
  • *3 Cooling fan wiring is not necessary for self-cooling motors.
  • *4 Connect DC power supply input to terminals - and +1.
  • WARNING Fire Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals - and +1. Do not

    connect AC power to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious injury or death from fire.

  • *5 NOTICE Damage to Equipment. When you use the drive with a non-grounding, high-resistance grounding, or asymmetric-grounding network, put the EMC Filter screw or screws in the OFF position to disable the built-in EMC filter. If you do not disable the built-in EMC filter, it will cause damage to the drive.
  • *6 Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
  • *7 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF.
  • *8 To set the MFDI power supply (Sinking/Sourcing Mode or internal/external power supply), install or remove a jumper between terminals SC-SP or SC-SN depending on the application.
  • NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

  • • Sinking Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SP.
  • NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

  • • Sourcing Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SN.
  • NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

  • • External power supply: Remove the jumper from the MFDI terminals. It is not necessary to close the circuit between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN.
  • *9 The maximum output current capacity for terminal +Von the control circuit is 20 mA.
  • Page 25

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not install a jumper between terminals +V and AC. A closed circuit between these terminals will cause damage to the drive.

  • *10 Jumper switch S1 sets terminals A1 and A2 for voltage or current input signal. The default setting for S1 is voltage input (“V” side) for A1 and current input (“I” side) for A2.
  • *11 NOTICE Do not ground the AC control circuit terminals and only connect the AC terminals as specified by the product instructions. If you connect the AC terminals incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
  • *12 Connect the positive lead from an external 24 Vdc power supply to terminal PS and the negative lead to terminal AC.
  • NOTICE Connect terminals PS and AC correctly for the 24 V power supply. If you connect the wires to the incorrect terminals, it will cause damage to the drive.

  • *13 Use multi-function analog monitor outputs with analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. Do not use monitor outputs with feedback-type signal devices.
  • *14 Jumper switch S5 sets terminal FM and AM for voltage or current output. The default setting for S5 is voltage output (“V” side).
  • *15 Set DIP switch S2 to “ON” to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
  • *16 Use only Sourcing Mode for Safe Disable input.
  • *17 Disconnect the jumpers between H1 and HC and H2 and HC to use the Safe Disable input.
  • ◆ Main Circuit Terminal Functions Refer to Table 7.1 for the functions of drive main circuit terminals.

    Table 7.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions

    |Terminal|Function| |---|---| |R/L1|Line side| |S/L2|Line side| |T/L3|Line side| |U/T1|Load side| |V/T2|Load side| |W/T3|Load side| |-|DC input terminal| |+1|DC input terminal| | |Ground terminal|

    ##### ◆ Motor and Main Circuit Connections

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, or +1 to the ground terminal. If you connect these terminals to earth ground, it can cause damage to the drive or serious injury or death.

    NOTICE Incorrect Operation. Route motor wiring and power wiring in separate conduits or cable trays to decrease possible interference-related issues.

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit and Motor

    Page 26

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Note: The location of terminals are different for different drive models.

  • A - DC bus terminal
  • B - Connect to the drive ground terminal.
  • C - Ground the motor case.
  • D - Three-Phase Motor
  • E - Use R, S, T for input power supply.
  • F - Input Protection (Fuses or Circuit Breakers)
  • ##### ◆ Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring

    ■ Wire Selection Select the correct wires for main circuit wiring. Refer to Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 90 for wire gauges and tightening torques as specified by European standards. Refer to Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications for UL Listing on page 33 for wire gauges and tightening torques as specified by UL standards.

    ############# Wire Selection Precautions

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. The IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically deenergize when the protective ground wire disconnects. You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum crosssectional area of 10mm2 (copper wire) or 16 mm2 (aluminum wire). For drive models on which you cannot use a protective ground wire of 10 mm2 or more, install two protective ground wires that have the same cross-sectional area. If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death. The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA.

    Think about line voltage drop before you select wire gauges. Select wire gauges that drop the voltage by 2% or less of the rated voltage. Increase the wire gauge and the cable length when the risk of voltage drop increases. Calculate line voltage drop with this formula:

    Line voltage drop (V) = × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × motor rated current (A) × 10-3. Precautions during Wiring Use terminals +1 and - to connect a regenerative converter or regenerative unit. Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications for UL Listing

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. The IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically deenergize when the protective ground wire disconnects. You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum crosssectional area of 10mm2 (copper wire) or 16 mm2 (aluminum wire). For drive models on which you cannot use a protective ground wire of 10 mm2 or more, install two protective ground wires that have the same cross-sectional area. If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death. The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA.

    Refer to Three-Phase 208 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 34 and Three-Phase 480 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 36 for the recommended wire gauges and tightening torques of the main circuit terminals.

    Note: The recommended wires for the main circuit are 600 V, Class 2 vinyl-insulated wires with a drive continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75 °C (167 °F). Assume these conditions:

    Page 27

  • •Ambient temperature: 40 °C (104 °F) or lower
  • •Wiring distance: 100 m (3281 ft) or shorter
  • •Normal Duty Rated current value
  • Screw Shapes

    ############## Table 7.2 Icons to Identify Screw Shapes

    |Icon|Screw Shape| |---|---| | |Phillips/slot combo (+/-)| | |Slotted (-)| | |Hex bolt (cross-slotted)|

    |Icon|Screw Shape| |---|---| | |Hex bolt (slotted)| | |Hex self-locking nut|

    ################ Three-Phase 208 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |2011|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2011|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2011|-, +1|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2011| |12 (4)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |2017|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|12 (4)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2017|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2017|-, +1|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2017| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |2024|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2024|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2024|-, +1|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2024| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |2031|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2031|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |2031|-, +1|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)|

    Page 28

    |2031| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |2046|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8 (10)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2046|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|6 (16)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2046|-, +1|6 (16)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2046| |8 (10)|14 - 4|-|M6|4.0 - 5.0 (35.4 - 44.3)| |2059|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2059|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2059|-, +1|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |2059| |6 (16)|14 - 4|-|M6|4.0 - 5.0 (35.4 - 44.3)|

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |2075|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4 (25)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2075|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3 or 2 (25 or 35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2075|-, +1|2 (35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2075| |6 (16)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |2088|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|3 or 2 (25 or 35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2088|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2 (35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2088|-, +1|1 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2088| |6 (16)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |2114|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2114|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2114|-, +1|2/0 (70)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |2114| |6 (16)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |2143|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2/0 (70)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2143|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2143|-, +1|3/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2143| |4 (25)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |2169|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|3/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2169|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2169|-, +1|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |2169| |4 (25)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |2211|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2211|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2211|-, +1|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|2 - 250 × 2P (4/0 - 250 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2211| |3 or 2 (25 or 35)|4 - 350 (-)|-|M10|18 - 23 (159 - 204)|

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|

    Page 29

    |2273|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2/0 × 2 (70 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2273|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2/0 × 2 (70 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2273|-, +1|3/0 × 2 (95 × 2)|2 - 250 × 2P (4/0 - 250 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |2273| |2 (35)|4 - 350 (-)|-|M10|18 - 23 (159 - 204)|

  • *1 The metric wire gauge values are provided as reference information from equivalent AWG size and not exactly the same size as the AWG/kcmil value. Comply with local safety regulations for wire sizes and make sure that the ferrule or crimp terminals are correct for your size.
  • *2 For IP20 protection, use wires that are in the range of applicable gauges.
  • *3 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown. Three-Phase 480 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques
  • |Model|Terminal|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |4005|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4005|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4005|-, +1|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4005| |14 (2.5)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |4008|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4008|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4008|-, +1|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4008| |14 (2.5)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |4011|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4011|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4011|-, +1|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4011| |12 (4)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |4014|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14 (2.5)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4014|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|12 (4)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4014|-, +1|12 (4)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4014| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)|

    |Model|Terminal|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |4021|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4021|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4021|-, +1|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4021| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |4027|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10 (6)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4027|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4027|-, +1|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4027| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)|

    Page 30

    |4034|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4034|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4034|-, +1|8 (10)|14 - 8|10|M4|1.5 - 1.7 (13.5 - 15)| |4034| |10 (6)|14 - 8|-|M5|2.0 - 2.5 (17.7 - 22.1)| |4040|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8 (10)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4040|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8 (10)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4040|-, +1|6 (16)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4040| |8 (10)|14 - 4|-|M6|4.0 - 5.0 (35.4 - 44.3)| |4052|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|6 (16)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4052|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|6 (16)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4052|-, +1|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4052| |8 (10)|14 - 4|-|M6|4.0 - 5.0 (35.4 - 44.3)| |4065|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4065|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4065|-, +1|4 (25)|14 - 4|18|M5|4.1 - 4.5 (36 - 40)| |4065| |6 (16)|14 - 4|-|M6|4.0 - 5.0 (35.4 - 44.3)|

    |Model|Terminal|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |4077|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4 (25)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4077|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3 or 2 (25 or 35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4077|-, +1|2 (35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4077| |6 (16)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |4096|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2 (35)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4096|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4096|-, +1|1 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4096| |6 (16)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |4124|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 (50)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4124|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2/0 (70)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4124|-, +1|2/0 (70)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|5.4 - 6.0 (47.8 - 53.1)| |4124| |4 (25)|8 - 2/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |4156|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2/0 (70)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |4156|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |4156|-, +1|4/0 (95)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|13.5 - 15 (119.5 - 132.8)| |4156| |4 (25)|6 - 4/0|-|M8|9.0 - 11 (79.7 - 97.4)| |4180|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |4180|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |4180|-, +1|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|2 - 250 × 2P (4/0 - 250 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |4180| |3 or 2 (25 or 35)|4 - 350 (-)|-|M10|18 - 23 (159 - 204)| |4240|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)|

    Page 31

    |4240|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2 (50 × 2)|3 - 4/0 × 2P (2/0 - 4/0 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |4240|-, +1|2/0 × 2 (70 × 2)|2 - 250 × 2P (4/0 - 250 × 2P)|-|M10|18 - 20 (159.3 - 177)| |4240| |2 (35)|4 - 350 (-)|-|M10|18 - 23 (159 - 204)|

    |Model|Terminal|Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil (mm2) *1|Applicable Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge *2) AWG, kcmil|Wire Stripping Length *3

    mm|Terminal Screw Size and Shape|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |4302|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|3/0 × 2 (95 × 2)|2/0 - 300 × 2P (250 - 300 × 2P)|-|M12|31.5 - 35 (279 - 310)| |4302|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0 × 2 (95 × 2)|2/0 - 300 × 2P (250 - 300 × 2P)|-|M12|31.5 - 35 (279 - 310)| |4302|-, +1|4/0 × 2 (95 × 2)|4/0 - 400 × 2P (300 - 400 × 2P)|-|M12|31.5 - 35 (279 - 310)| |4302| |1/0 (50)|1 - 350 (-)|-|M12|32 - 40 (283 - 354)|

  • *1 The metric wire gauge values are provided as reference information from equivalent AWG size and not exactly the same size as the AWG/kcmil value. Comply with local safety regulations for wire sizes and make sure that the ferrule or crimp terminals are correct for your size.
  • *2 For IP20 protection, use wires that are in the range of applicable gauges.
  • *3 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown.
  • ##### ◆ Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure that there is an electrical bond between the metallic conduit and the metallic conduit mounting bracket after installation is complete. If there is not an electrical bond, it can cause injury or death from electrical shock.

    The procedures to wire the main circuit terminal block are different for different drive models. Refer to Table 7.3 for procedures by drive model.

    Table 7.3 Types of Wiring Procedure for the Main Circuit Terminal Block

    |Model|IP20/UL Type 1 or IP20/UL Open Type|IP20/UL Type 1 or IP20/UL Open Type|IP55/UL Type 12|IP55/UL Type 12| |---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Procedure|Reference|Procedure|Reference| |2011 - 2059 4005 - 4065|Procedure A|41|Procedure E|48| |2075 - 2114 4077|Procedure B|42|Procedure F|49| |4124|Procedure B|42|Procedure F|49| |2143, 2169 4156|Procedure C|44|Procedure G|51| |2211 - 2273 4180 - 4302|Procedure D|46|-|-|

    ##### ■ Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block of Models 2011 to 2059 and 4005 to 4065 Read these safety messages and notes before you wire the main circuit terminal block.

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Do not use bent or crushed wires. Remove the damaged end of the wire before you use it. Incorrect connections can cause death or serious injury from fire.

    Page 32

    WARNING Fire Hazard. If you use stranded wire, make sure that all of the wire strands are in the connection. Also, do not twist the stranded wire too much. Incorrect connections can cause death or serious injury from fire.

    NOTICE Do not solder stranded wire. Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory drive performance.

    NOTICE If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws, use a low speed setting (300 min-1 (r/min) to 400 min-1 (r/ min)). High speeds can cause damage to the terminal screws.

    NOTICE Do not tighten the terminal screws at an angle of 5 degrees or more. Incorrect positioning can cause damage to the terminal screws.

    Figure 7.2 Permitted Angle Note:

  • •Use UL Listed vinyl-coated insulated copper wires for operation with a continuous maximum permitted temperature of 75 °C at 600 V.
  • •Remove all unwanted objects that are near the terminal block connections.
  • •Remove the insulation from the connection wires to the wire stripping lengths shown in the manual.
  • •Put the wire all the way into the terminal block. Remove the insulation from the wire to the recommended wire stripping length to fit the wire with insulation in the plastic housing.
  • •Use a torque driver, torque ratchet, or torque wrench for the screws. A slotted driver or a hex tool will be necessary to wire the screw clamp terminal. Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in the product manual.
  • •Users can purchase wiring tools from Yaskawa. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
  • •Wire gauges on existing drive models to be replaced may not match wire gauge ranges on new drives. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information about the connection procedures.
  • •Put the bit all the way into the hex socket to tighten the hex socket cap screw.
  • •When tightening slotted screws, hold the straight-edge screwdriver perpendicularly to the screw. Take care to ensure that the tip of the straight-edge screwdriver is aligned with the screw groove.
  • Figure 7.3 Tightening Slotted Screws

  • •After connecting the wires to the terminal block, lightly pull on the wires to make sure that they do not come out of the terminals.
  • •Remove the correct section of the wiring cover to make wiring easier.
  • •Do not let strain on the wiring cause damage. Use a strain relief near the wiring to release the tension. Refer to Figure 7.4 for an example.
  • A - Cable clamp

    Figure 7.4 Strain Relief Example Table 7.4 Recommended Wiring Tools

    |Screw Size and Shape|Adapter|Bit Model Manufacturer: PHOENIX CONTACT|Torque Driver Model (Adjustable Tightening Torque)| |---|---|---|---| |M4|Bit|SF-BIT-SL 1,0X4,0-70|TSD-M 3NM (0.2 - 3 N∙m (1.8 - 26.6 lbf∙in))| |M5 *1|Bit|SF-BIT-SL 1,2X6,5-70|TSD-M 3NM (0.2 - 3 N∙m (1.8 - 26.6 lbf∙in))|

    *1 For M5 screw size and the tightening torque is more than 3 N∙m, use a torque wrench with the recommended bit.

    ##### ■ Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block of Models 2075 to 2114 and 4077 to 4124

    Page 33

    Note:

  • •After the wiring, do not twist or shake the electrical wires too much.
  • •Be sure to use only wires with the correct size, stripped wire length, and tightening torque as specified by Yaskawa.
  • •Use tools that fit the shape of the screw head to tighten and loosen the terminal block screws.
  • •Make sure that there are no loose stranded wires or frayed wires after wiring is complete.
  • ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure A

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

  • 1. Remove the keypad and front cover.
  • 2. Remove the screws that attach the conduit bracket and remove the conduit bracket from the drive.
  • A - Conduit bracket Figure 7.5 Remove the Conduit Bracket

  • 3. Put the end of a straight-edge screwdriver into the center hole and move it up and down to remove the knockout hole.
  • WARNING Injury to Personnel. Carefully move the screwdriver to remove the knock-out holes. If you use too much pressure on the circular metal plates, they can eject and cause injury.

  • 4. Use a file to make the rough surface of the knock-out hole edge smooth.
  • 5. Put the conduit bracket in its initial position.
  • Figure 7.6 Reattach the Conduit Bracket

  • 6. Put the ends of prepared wires through the conduits and into the terminal block, then tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque.
  • Note:

  • •When you use terminals - and +1 and these terminals have covers, remove them to install the wire.
  • •Use conduits to keep the IP20 protection level and to prevent damage to the wires. To comply with UL standards, you must use conduits for wiring.
  • Figure 7.7 Install the Electrical Wires

  • Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
  • Page 34

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure B

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

  • 1. Remove the keypad and front cover.
  • 2. Remove the screws that attach the conduit bracket and remove the conduit bracket from the drive.
  • | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - Conduit bracket Figure 7.8 Remove the Conduit Bracket

  • 3. Put the end of a straight-edge screwdriver into the center hole and move it up and down to remove the knockout hole.
  • WARNING Injury to Personnel. Carefully move the screwdriver to remove the knock-out holes. If you use too much pressure on the circular metal plates, they can eject and cause injury.

  • 4. Use a file to make the rough surface of the knock-out hole edge smooth.
  • 5. Put the conduit bracket in its initial position.
  • Figure 7.9 Reattach the Conduit Bracket

  • 6. Remove the terminal block bolts.
  • A - Bolt

    Figure 7.10 Remove the Terminal Block Bolts

    Page 35

  • 7. Put the ends of wires with closed-loop crimp terminals through the conduits.
  • | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---|

    Page 36

    | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | |

    Page 37

    |---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Note:

  • •When you use terminals - and +1 and these terminals have covers, remove them to install the wire.
  • •Use conduits to keep the IP20 protection level and to prevent damage to the wires. To comply with UL standards, you must use conduits for wiring.
  • Page 38

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    ############ 7 Electrical Installation

    | | | | |---|---|---|

  • 8. Align the closed-loop crimp terminals with the bolt holes on main circuit terminal block and attach the crimp terminal to the main circuit terminal block.
  • Figure 7.11 Install the Electrical Wires

  • 9. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
  • Figure 7.12 Tighten the Terminal Block Bolts

  • 10. Put the terminal cover back in its initial position.
  • | | | |---|---|

    Page 39

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|

    Page 40

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure C

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

  • Remove the terminal cover.
  • 2. Remove the screws that attach the conduit bracket and remove the conduit bracket from the drive.
  • A - Conduit bracket Figure 7.13 Remove the Conduit Bracket

  • 3. Put the end of a straight-edge screwdriver into the center hole and move it up and down to remove the knockout hole.
  • WARNING Injury to Personnel. Carefully move the screwdriver to remove the knock-out holes. If you use too much pressure on the circular metal plates, they can eject and cause injury.

  • 4. Use a file to make the rough surface of the knock-out hole edge smooth.
  • 5. Put the conduit bracket in its initial position.
  • | | |

    Page 41

    |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 7.14 Reattach the Conduit Bracket

    | | |---| | |

    ############ 7 Electrical Installation

  • 6. Remove the terminal block bolts.
  • A - Bolt

    Figure 7.15 Remove the Terminal Block Bolts

  • 7. Put the ends of wires with closed-loop crimp terminals through the conduits.
  • Note:

    Use conduits to keep the IP20 protection level and to prevent damage to the wires. To comply with UL standards, you must use conduits for wiring.

  • 8. Align the closed-loop crimp terminals with the bolt holes on main circuit terminal block and attach the crimp terminal to the main circuit terminal block.
  • Figure 7.16 Install the Electrical Wires

  • 9. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
  • Figure 7.17 Tighten the Terminal Block Bolts

  • 10. Put the terminal cover back in its initial position.
  • Page 42

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |

    Page 43

    |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    Page 44

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure D

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

  • Remove the terminal cover.
  • Page 45

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

  • 2. Remove the screws on the terminal block cover and pull the terminal block cover away from the drive. Pull the wiring cover away from the drive. Do not discard the wiring cover.
  • A - Terminal block cover B - Wiring cover Figure 7.18 Remove the Wiring Cover

  • 3. Remove the terminal block nuts.
  • A - Nut

    Figure 7.19 Remove the Terminal Block Nuts

  • 4. Put the ends of wires with closed-loop crimp terminals on the main circuit terminal block studs.
  • Figure 7.20 Install the Electrical Wires

  • 5. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque.
  • | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Page 46

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Figure 7.21 Tighten the Terminal Block Nuts

    ############ 7 Electrical Installation

  • Check the signal from the wired terminal and use a diagonal-cutting pliers to remove areas of the wiring cover cutaway section. Cut the correct areas shown in Figure 7.22 for your wire gauges.
  • A - Cutaway section B - Use a diagonal-cutting pliers to

    clip this area for small wires.

    C - Use a diagonal-cutting pliers to clip this area for large wires.

    Figure 7.22 Clip the Cutaway Section of the Wiring Cover Note:

  • •Different drive models have different wiring covers.
  • •Remove only the areas of the wiring cover that apply to the wired terminals. If you remove areas that do not apply to the wired terminal, the drive will not keep its IP20 protective level.
  • •Make sure that you hold the cutaway section tightly when you remove pieces of the cutaway section. Pieces of the cutaway section can fly out and cause injury.
  • •Remove sharp edges from the wiring cover cutaway section to prevent damage to the wires.
  • •If you use the wiring cover correctly, but you use wires that are not specified by Yaskawa, the drive will not necessarily keep its IP20 protective level.
  • •When you use the recommended gauge for the electrical wires, it is not necessary to attach the wiring cover of the main circuit power input terminal and the drive output terminal. If you use the applicable gauge for the electrical wires, you must attach the wiring cover.
  • 7. Attach the wiring cover and terminal block cover to their initial positions and tighten the screws on the terminal block cover.
  • Figure 7.23 Reattach the Wiring Cover

  • 8. Put the terminal cover back in its initial position.
  • ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure E

    Page 47

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

  • 1. Remove the keypad and front cover.
  • 2. Put the ends of prepared wires through the conduits and into the terminal block, then tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque.
  • Note: When you use terminals - and +1 and these terminals have covers, remove them to install the wire.

    Figure 7.24 Install the Electrical Wires

  • Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
  • Note:

  • •Install the correct control circuit conduit to keep the protection level. Install the included rubber waterproofing grommets for any knock-out holes that you do not use for control circuit wiring.
  • •The knock-out holes for main circuit wiring do not have rubber grommets. Install the correct conduit to keep the IP55/UL Type 12 protection level.
  • | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    A - Rubber grommets

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 48

    | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    | | |---| | |

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure F

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

  • 1. Remove the keypad and front cover.
  • 2. Remove the terminal block bolt.
  • Note: When you use terminals - and +1 and these terminals have covers, remove them to install the wire.

    A - Bolt

    Figure 7.25 Remove the Terminal Block Bolts

    Page 49

  • 3. Put the ends of wires with closed-loop crimp terminals through the conduits.
  • | | | |---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    Page 50

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 51

    ############ 7 Electrical Installation

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

  • Align the closed-loop crimp terminals with the bolt holes on main circuit terminal block and attach the crimp
  • terminal to the main circuit terminal block.

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Figure 7.26 Install the Electrical Wires

  • Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
  • | | | | |---|---|---|

    Page 52

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    Figure 7.27 Tighten the Terminal Block Bolts

  • Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
  • Note:

  • •Install the correct control circuit conduit to keep the protection level. Install the included rubber waterproofing grommets for any knock-out holes that you do not use for control circuit wiring.
  • •The knock-out holes for main circuit wiring do not have rubber grommets. Install the correct conduit to keep the IP55/UL Type 12 protection level.
  • ############## A - Rubber grommets

    ##### ■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Using Procedure G

    ############# Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

    Page 53

  • 1. Open the front door.
  • Figure 7.28 Open the Front Door

  • 2. Remove the terminal block bolt.
  • Note: When you use terminals - and +1 and these terminals have covers, remove them to install the wire.

    A - Bolt

    Figure 7.29 Remove the Terminal Block Bolts

  • 3. Put the ends of wires with closed-loop crimp terminals through the conduits.
  • 4. Align the closed-loop crimp terminals with the bolt holes on main circuit terminal block.
  • | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    Figure 7.30 Install the Electrical Wires

    ############ 7 Electrical Installation

  • Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
  • Close the front door.
  • Figure 7.31 Tighten the Terminal Block Bolts

    Figure 7.32 Close the Front Door Note:

  • •Install the correct control circuit conduit to keep the protection level. Install the included rubber waterproofing grommets for any knock-out holes that you do not use for control circuit wiring.
  • •The knock-out holes for main circuit wiring do not have rubber grommets. Install the correct conduit to keep the IP55/UL Type 12 protection level.
  • ############## A - Rubber grommets

    Page 54

    #### 8 Keypad: Names and Functions

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Figure 8.1 Keypad Table 8.1 Keypad: Names and Functions

    |No.|Name|Function| |---|---|---| |A|AUTO LED *1|Illuminates to show that the drive is in AUTO Mode.| |B|ALM LED|Illuminates when the drive detects a fault. Flashes when the drive detects:

    • An alarm
    • An oPE parameter setting error
    • A fault or alarm during Auto-Tuning The LED turns off when there are no drive faults or alarms.
    | |C|microSD Card Insertion Slot|The insertion point for a microSD card.| |D|Function Keys (F1, F2, F3)|The menu shown on the keypad sets the functions for function keys. The name of each function is in the lower half of the display window.| |E|HAND LED *1|Illuminates to show that the drive is in HAND Mode.| |F|HAND Key|Sets drive operation to HAND Mode. The drive uses the S5-01 [HAND Frequency Reference Selection] setting.| |G|OFF Key|Stops drive operation. Note: The OFF key has highest priority. Push to stop the motor even when a Run command is active at an external Run command source. Set o2-02 0 [STOP Key Function Selection Disabled] to disable priority.|

    |No.|Name|Function| |---|---|---| |H|Left Arrow Key|Moves the cursor to the left.| |H|Up Arrow Key/Down Arrow Key /|• Scrolls up or down to display the next item or the previous item.
    • Selects parameter numbers, and increments or decrements setting values.
    | |H|Right Arrow Key (RESET)|• Moves the cursor to the right.
    • Continues to the next screen.
    • Clears drive faults.
    | |H|ENTER Key|• Enters parameter values and settings.
    • Selects menu items to move the user between keypad displays.
    • Selects each mode, parameter, and set value.
    | |I|AUTO Key|Sets drive operation to AUTO Mode. The drive uses the b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] and b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1] settings.

    Note: Push on the keypad to set the drive to HAND Mode before you use the keypad to operate the motor.| |J|USB Terminal|Insertion point for a mini USB cable. Uses a USB cable (USB standard 2.0, type A - mini-B) to connect the keypad to a PC.| |K|RJ-45 Connector|Uses an RJ-45 8-pin straight through UTP CAT5e extension cable or keypad connector to connect to the drive.| |L|Clock Battery Cover|Cover for the clock battery.

    Note:

    • The battery included with the keypad is for operation check. It may be exhausted earlier than the expected battery life described in the manual.
    • Refer to “Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual (TOEPYAIHV6001)” for more information about replacement procedure. To replace the battery, use a Hitachi Maxell “CR2016 Lithium Manganese Dioxide Lithium Battery” or an equivalent battery with these properties:
    • Nominal voltage: 3 V
    • Operating temperature range: -20 °C to +85 °C (-4 °F to +185 °F)
    | |M|Insulation Sheet|An insulating sheet is attached to the keypad battery to prevent battery drain. Remove the insulation sheet before you use the keypad for the first time.|

    *1 Refer to AUTO LED and HAND LED Indications on page 54 for more information about AUTO LED and HAND LED indications.

    ##### ◆ AUTO LED and HAND LED Indications

    Table 8.2 AUTO LED and HAND LED Indications

    |AUTO LED|HAND LED|Status| |---|---|---|

    Page 55

    |OFF|OFF|OFF Mode| |OFF|ON|HAND Mode| |OFF|Long blink (50% duty)|HAND Mode

    • When the Frequency Reference is 0 or during deceleration
    • During PI Sleep
    | |OFF|Double blink|HAND Mode When you clear the Run command and enter the Run command again during the time set in C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1]| |ON|OFF|AUTO Mode| |Long blink (50% duty)|OFF|AUTO Mode

    • When the Frequency Reference is 0 or during deceleration
    • During PI Sleep
    | |Double blink|OFF|AUTO Mode When an MFDI sends a Fast Stop signal to stop the drive|

    Figure 8.2 AUTO LED and HAND LED Timing Status

    Figure 8.3 LEDs and Drive Operation in AUTO and HAND Modes

    ##### ◆ Keypad Mode and Menu Displays

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    Page 56

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    Page 57

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    Figure 8.4 Keypad Functions and Display Levels

    9 LED Status Ring

    Note:

  • •Energize the drive with factory defaults to show the Initial Setup screen. Push (Home) to show the HOME screen.
  • –Select [No] from the [Show Initial Setup Screen] setting to not display the Initial Setup screen.

  • •Push from the Home screen to show drive monitors.
  • •Push to set d1-01 [Reference 1] when you set b1-01 = 0 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Keypad] and the Home screen shows U101 [Frequency Reference].
  • •The keypad will show [Rdy] when the drive is in Drive Mode. The drive is prepared to accept a Run command.
  • •The drive will not accept a Run command in Programming Mode in the default setting. Set b1-08 [Run Command Select in PRG Mode] to accept or reject a Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode.
  • Page 58

  • –Set b1-08 = 0 [Disregard RUN while Programming] to reject the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode (default).
  • –Set b1-08 = 1 [Accept RUN while Programming] to accept the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode.
  • –Set b1-08 2 [Allow Programming Only at Stop] to prevent changes from Drive Mode to Programming Mode while the drive is operating.
  • Table 8.3 Drive Mode Screens and Functions

    |Mode|Keypad Screen|Function| |---|---|---| |Drive Mode|Monitors|Sets monitor items to display.| |Programming Mode|Parameters|Changes parameter settings.| |Programming Mode|User Custom Parameters|Shows the User Parameters.| |Programming Mode|Parameter Backup/Restore|Saves parameters to the keypad as backup.| |Programming Mode|Modified Parameters/Fault Log|Shows modified parameters and fault history.| |Programming Mode|Auto-Tuning|Auto-Tunes the drive.| |Programming Mode|Initial Setup|Changes initial settings.| |Programming Mode|Diagnostic Tools|Sets data logs and backlight.|

    #### 9 LED Status Ring

    The LED Status Ring on the drive cover shows the drive operating status.

  • A - ALM/ERR
  • B - Ready
  • C - RUN

    9 LED Status Ring

    |LED|LED|Status|Description| |---|---|---|---| |A|ALM/ERR|Illuminated|The drive detects a fault.| |A|ALM/ERR|Flashing *1|The drive detects:

    • An alarm
    • An oPE parameter setting error
    • An Auto-Tuning error Note: If the drive detects a fault and an alarm at the same time, the LED will illuminate to identify a fault.
    | |A|ALM/ERR|OFF|There are no drive faults or alarms.| |B|Ready|Illuminated|The drive is operating or is prepared for operation.| |B|Ready|Flashing *1|The drive is in STo [Safe Torque OFF] condition.| |B|Ready|Flashing Quickly *1|The voltage of the main circuit power supply dropped, and only the external 24 V power supply is providing the power to the drive.| |B|Ready|OFF|• The drive detects a fault.
    • There is no fault and the drive received a Run command, but the drive cannot operate. For example, in Programming Mode.
    | |C|RUN|Illuminated|The drive is in regular operation.|

    Page 59

    |C|RUN|Flashing *1|• The drive is decelerating to stop.
    • The drive received a Run command with a frequency reference of 0 Hz.
    • The drive received a DC Injection Braking command.
    | |C|RUN|Flashing Quickly *1|• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when b1-02 0 [Run Command Selection 1 Keypad] and you changed the setting to b1-02 1 or 7 [Digital Input or AUTO Command + Term Run].
    • The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when the drive is not in Drive Mode.
    • The drive received a Fast Stop command.
    • The safety function shuts off the drive output.
    • The user pushed on the keypad when the drive is operated from a REMOTE source.
    • The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN Command].
    • The drive is set to coast-to-stop with timer (b1-03 = 3 [Stopping Method Selection = Coast to Stop with Timer]), and the Run command is disabled then enabled during the Run wait time.
    | |C|RUN|OFF|The motor is stopped.|

    *1 Refer to Figure 9.1 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Figure 9.1 LED Flashing Statuses

    Figure 9.2 Relation between RUN LED and Drive Operation

    #### 10 Drive Start-Up Procedure

  • 1. Confirm the drive and motor specifications.
  • 2. Confirm the correct drive installation environment.
  • 3. Use the enclosed drilling template to install the drive.
  • 4. Select the motor and power wires, wire strip length, crimp terminals, and branch circuit protection.
  • 5. Remove the keypad, front cover, conduit bracket, and knock-outs.
  • 6. Install the motor wiring and power wiring.
  • 7. Install the front cover and keypad.
  • 8. Energize the drive and confirm it is ready.
  • 9. Set the motor rated current (FLA) from the motor nameplate in E2-01.
  • 10. Set the drive for HAND operation and check the motor rotation direction. The drive is prepared to run the operation.
  • ##### ◆ Change Parameter Settings

    This example shows how to change the setting value for C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1]. Do the steps in this procedure to set parameters for the application.

  • 1. Push (Home) to show the HOME screen.
  • Note:

    Page 60

  • •When the drive is in HOME Mode, the screen shows [Home] in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
  • •If [Home] is not shown above the , push (Back).
  • 2. Push (Menu).
  • 3. Push or to select [Parameters], then push .
  • 4. Push or to select [C Tuning], then push .
  • | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

  • 5. Push or to select [C1 Accel & Decel Time], then push .
  • 6. Push or to select C1-01, then push .
  • 7. Push or to select the specified digit, then push or to select the correct number.
  • • Push (Default) to set the parameters to factory defaults.
  • • Push (Min/Max) to show the minimum value or the maximum value on the display.
  • 8. Push to keep the changes.
  • 9. Continue to change parameters, then push (Back), (Home) to go back to the home screen after you change all the applicable parameters.
  • Page 61

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    ###### ◆ Disable the Initial Setup Screen Do the steps in this procedure to not show the initial start-up screen when the drive is energized.

  • 1. Push (Home) to show the HOME screen.
  • Note:

  • •When the drive is in HOME Mode, the screen shows [Home] in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
  • •If the screen does not show [Home] for , push (Back), and then push to show [Home].
  • 2. Push (Menu).
  • | | |---| | | | |

    Page 62

    | | | |

  • 3. Push / to select [Initial Setup], then push .
  • 4. Push / to select [Show Initial Setup Screen], then push .
  • 5. Push / to select [No], then push .
  • | | |---| | | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

  • • [No]: The keypad will not show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized.
  • • [Yes]: The keypad will show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized.
  • ◆ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions Hx-xx parameters set functions for the multi-function input and output terminals.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire and test all control circuits to make sure that the control circuits operate correctly. If you use a drive that has incorrect control circuit wiring or operation, it can cause death or serious injury.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Check the I/O signals and the external sequences for the drive before you set the Application Preset function. When you set the Application Preset function (A1-06 ≠ 0), it changes the I/O terminal functions for the drive and it can cause equipment to operate unusually. This can cause serious injury or death.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.

    ■ Input Terminals Refer to Table 10.1 for a list of input terminals and functions.

    Table 10.1 Multi-function Input Terminals

    |Type|Terminal|Name (Default)|Function (Signal Level)| |---|---|---|---| |MFDI|S1|MFDI selection 1 (ON: Forward RUN (2-Wire) OFF: Stop)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|S2|MFDI selection 2 (Not Used)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    |

    Page 63

    |MFDI|S3|MFDI selection 3 (External Fault (NO-Always-Coast))|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|S4|MFDI selection 4 (Fault Reset)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|S5|MFDI selection 5 (Multi-Step Speed Reference 1)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|S6|MFDI selection 6 (Multi-Step Speed Reference 2)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|S7|MFDI selection 7 (Jog Reference Selection)|Multi-Function Digital Input

    • Photocoupler
    • 24 V, 6 mA Note: Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
    • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    • External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
    | |MFDI|SN|MFDI power supply 0 V|MFDI power supply, 24 V (maximum 150 mA)

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.| |MFDI|SC|MFDI selection common|MFDI power supply, 24 V (maximum 150 mA)

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.| |MFDI|SP|MFDI power supply +24 Vdc|MFDI power supply, 24 V (maximum 150 mA)

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.| |Safe Disable Input|H1|Safe Disable input 1|Safe Disable Input Remove the jumper between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to use the Safe Disable input.

    • 24 V, 6 mA
    • ON: Normal operation
    • OFF: Coasting motor
    • Internal impedance 4.7 kΩ
    • OFF Minimum OFF time of 2 ms.
    | |Safe Disable Input|H2|Safe Disable input 2|Safe Disable Input Remove the jumper between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to use the Safe Disable input.

    • 24 V, 6 mA
    • ON: Normal operation
    • OFF: Coasting motor
    • Internal impedance 4.7 kΩ
    • OFF Minimum OFF time of 2 ms.
    | |Safe Disable Input|HC|Safe Disable function common|Safe Disable function common

    NOTICE Do not close the circuit between terminals HC and SN. A closed circuit between these terminals will cause damage to the drive.| |Master Frequency Reference|+V|Power supply for frequency setting|Power Supply for Multi-Function Analog Input

    • 10.5 V (allowable current 20 mA maximum)| |Master Frequency Reference|A1|MFAI1 (Frequency Reference)|Voltage input or current input Select terminal A1 with Jumper switch S1 and H3-01 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select].

    • 0 V to 10 V/100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
    • 4 mA to 20 mA/100%, 0 mA to 20 mA/100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    | |Master Frequency Reference|A2|MFAI2 (Combined to terminal A1)|Voltage input or current input Select terminal A2 with Jumper switch S1 and H3-09 [Terminal A2 Signal Level Select]

    • 0 V to 10 V/100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
    • 4 mA to 20 mA/100%, 0 mA to 20 mA/100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    | |Master Frequency Reference|AC|Frequency reference common|Signal Ground for Multi-Function Analog Input

    • 0 V| |Master Frequency Reference|FE|Connecting shielded cable|Frame Earth|

    ■ Output Terminals Refer to Table 10.2 and Table 10.3 for a list of output terminals and functions.

    Table 10.2 Control Circuit Output Terminals

    |Type|Terminal|Name (Default)|Function (Signal Level)| |---|---|---|---| |Fault Relay Output|MA|N.O. output (Fault)|Drive Fault Signal Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
    | |Fault Relay Output|MB|N.C. output (Fault)|Drive Fault Signal Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
    | |Fault Relay Output|MC|Digital output common|Drive Fault Signal Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
    | |MFDO|M1|MFDO (During Run)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).| |MFDO|M2|MFDO (During Run)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).| |MFDO|M3|MFDO (Zero Speed)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).| |MFDO|M4|MFDO (Zero Speed)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).| |MFDO|M5|MFDO (Speed Agree 1)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).| |MFDO|M6|MFDO (Speed Agree 1)|Multi Function Digital Output

    • Relay output
    • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 2 A
    • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 2 A
    • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value) Note:


    Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).|

  • Table 10.3 Control Circuit Monitor Output Terminals
  • ■ External Power Supply Input Terminals
  • Refer to Table 10.4 for a list of the functions of the external power supply input terminals.
  • Page 64

    Table 10.4 External Power Supply Input Terminals

    ■ Serial Communication Terminals

  • Refer to Table 10.5 for a list of serial communication terminals and functions. Table 10.5 Serial Communication Terminals
  • |Type|Terminal|Name (Default)|Function (Signal Level)| |---|---|---|---| |Monitor Output|FM|MFAO 1 (Output frequency)|Multi Function Analog Output Select voltage or current output.

    • 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100%
    • 4 mA to 20 mA (receiver recommended impedance: 250 Ω) Note:


    Select with jumper switch S5 and H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select] or H4-08 [Terminal AM Signal Level Select].| |Monitor Output|AM|MFAO 2 (Output current)|Multi Function Analog Output Select voltage or current output.

    • 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100%
    • 4 mA to 20 mA (receiver recommended impedance: 250 Ω) Note:


    Select with jumper switch S5 and H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select] or H4-08 [Terminal AM Signal Level Select].| |Monitor Output|AC|Monitor common|0 V| |External Power Supply Output|+P|External power supply|Power supply for external devices.

    • 24 V (150 mA maximum)|

    |Type|Terminal|Name (Default)|Function| |---|---|---|---| |External Power Supply Input Terminals|PS|External 24 V power supply input|Supplies backup power to the drive control circuit, keypad, and option board. 21.6 VDC to 26.4 VDC, 700 mA| |External Power Supply Input Terminals|AC|External 24 V power supply ground|0 V|

    |Type|Terminal|Terminal Name|Function (Signal Level)|Function (Signal Level)| |---|---|---|---|---| |Serial Communication|D+|Communication input/output (+)|• APOGEE FLN communications
    • BACnet communications
    • MEMOBUS/ Modbus communications
    • Metasys N2 communications Use an RS-485 cable to connect the drive.


    Note:

    Set DIP switch S2 to ON to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in an APOGEE FLN, BACnet, MEMOBUS/ Modbus, or Metasys N2 network.|• RS-485
    • APOGEE FLN communications: 4.8 kbps
    • BACnet communications: Maximum 76.8 kbps
    • MEMOBUS/Modbus communications: Maximum 115.2 kbps
    • Metasys N2 communications: 9.6 kbps
    | |Serial Communication|D-|Communication output (-)|• APOGEE FLN communications
    • BACnet communications
    • MEMOBUS/ Modbus communications
    • Metasys N2 communications Use an RS-485 cable to connect the drive.


    Note:

    Set DIP switch S2 to ON to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in an APOGEE FLN, BACnet, MEMOBUS/ Modbus, or Metasys N2 network.|• RS-485
    • APOGEE FLN communications: 4.8 kbps
    • BACnet communications: Maximum 76.8 kbps
    • MEMOBUS/Modbus communications: Maximum 115.2 kbps
    • Metasys N2 communications: 9.6 kbps
    | |Serial Communication|AC|Signal ground|0 V|0 V| |Serial Communication|FE|Option card ground|-|-|

    ◆ Control Circuit Terminal Configuration The control circuit terminals are in the positions shown in Figure 10.1.

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | | |

    Page 65

    |---|---|---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Page 66

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |

    Page 67

    |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    Page 68

    | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Figure 10.1 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement

    The tightening torque for the terminal screws is shown on the reverse side or the lower front side of the front cover.

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Figure 10.2 Tightening Torque Display Location (Reverse Side of Front Cover)

    Figure 10.3 Tightening Torque Display Location (Lower Front Side of Front Cover)

    Page 69

    ##### ■ Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

    Use the tables in this section to select the correct wires. Use shielded wire to wire the control circuit terminal block. Use crimp ferrules on the wire ends to make the wiring procedure easier and more reliable.

    Table 10.6 Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

    |Terminal Block|Terminal|Screw Size|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)|Bare Wire|Bare Wire|Crimp Ferrule|Crimp Ferrule| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Terminal Block|Terminal|Screw Size|Tightening Torque N∙m (lbf∙in)|Recommended Gauge

    mm2 (AWG)|Applicable Gauge mm2 (AWG)|Recommended Gauge

    mm2 (AWG)|Applicable Gauge mm2 (AWG)| |TB1|+V, AC, A1, A2, FM|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB3|AM, AC, S1 - S7|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB4|SN, SC, SP, +P|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB5|SN, HC, H1, H2|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB6|AC, D+, D-, PS|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB7|MA, MB, MC, M1 - M6|M3|0.5 - 0.6 (4.4 - 5.3)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16) Solid wire: 0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)| |TB2|FE|M3|1.0 - 1.2 (8.85 - 10.62)|0.75 (18)|Stranded wire: 0.12 - 0.75 (26 - 18) Solid wire: 0.2 - 1.5 (26 - 16)|0.75 (18)|0.25 - 1.5 (24 - 16)|

    Crimp Ferrules Attach an insulated sleeve when you use crimp ferrules. Refer to Table 10.7 for the recommended external dimensions and model numbers of the crimp ferrules. Use the CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool made by PHOENIX CONTACT.

    Figure 10.4 External Dimensions of Crimp Ferrules Table 10.7 Crimp Ferrule Models and Sizes

    |Wire Gauge mm2 (AWG)|Model|L (mm)|L1 (mm)|φd1 (mm)|φd2 (mm)| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |0.25 (24)|AI 0.25-8YE|12.5|8|0.8|2.0| |0.34 (22)|AI 0.34-8TQ|12.5|8|0.8|2.0| |0.5 (20)|AI 0.5-8WH AI 0.5-8OG|14|8|1.1|2.5| |0.75 (18)|AI 0.75-8 GY|14|8|1.3|2.8|

    ##### ◆ Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.

    NOTICE Do not let wire shields touch other signal lines or equipment. Insulate the wire shields with electrical tape or shrink tubing. If you do not insulate the wire shields, it can cause a short circuit and damage the drive.

    ############## Note:

  • •Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1) and other high-power wiring. If the control circuit wires are adjacent to the main circuit wires, electrical interference can cause the drive or the devices around the drive to malfunction.
  • •Isolate contact output terminals MA, MB, MC and M1-M6 from other control circuit wiring. If the output terminal wires are adjacent to other control circuit wires, electrical interference can cause the drive or devices around the drive to malfunction.
  • •Use a UL Listed Class 2 Power Supply to connect external power to the control terminals. If the power supply for peripheral devices is incorrect, it can cause a decrease in drive performance.
  • Page 70

  • •Connect the shield of shielded cable to the applicable ground terminal. If the grounding is not correct, electrical interference can cause the drive or devices around the drive to malfunction.
  • Correctly ground the drive terminals and complete main circuit wiring before you wire the control circuit. Remove the keypad and front cover.

  • Refer to Figure 10.5 and wire the control circuit.
  • WARNING Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque. Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.

    ############## Note:

  • •Use shielded wires and shielded twisted-pair wires for the control circuit terminal wiring. If the grounding is not correct, electrical interference can cause the drive or devices around it to malfunction.
  • •Do not use control circuit wiring that is longer than 50 m (164 ft) to supply the frequency reference with an analog signal from a remote source. Wiring that is too long can cause unsatisfactory system performance.
  • A - Loosen the screws and put the wire into the opening on the terminal block.
  • B - Wire with a crimp ferrule attached, or use wire that is not soldered with the core wires lightly twisted.
  • C - Pull back the shielding and lightly twist the end with your fingers to keep the ends from fraying.
  • D - If you do not use crimp ferrules, remove approximately 5.5 mm (0.21 in) of the covering at the end of the wire.
  • E - Blade width of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) or less
  • F - Blade depth of 0.4 mm (0.01 in) or less
  • Figure 10.5 Wiring Procedure for the Control Circuit

    WARNING Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque. Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.

    NOTICE Do not solder the core wire. Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory drive performance.

    ############## Note:

  • •Refer to Figure 10.6 for information to prepare terminal ends of the shielded wire.
  • •Prepare the wire ends of shielded twisted-pair wires as shown in Figure 10.6 to use an analog reference from an external frequency setting potentiometer to set the frequency. Connect the shield to terminal FE of the drive.
  • A - Connect the shield to terminal FE of the drive.
  • B - Sheath
  • Page 71

    C - Insulate with electrical tape or shrink tubing.

    Figure 10.6 Prepare the Ends of Shielded Wire

    Note: If you use multi-conductor shielded cable that is too thick to put through the hook on the drive, you can remove the cable sheath.

    A - Hook

  • 2. Put the cables through the clearance of the drive and knock-out holes.
  • Figure 10.7 Control Circuit Wiring

  • 3. Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
  • ◆ Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board The terminal board has switches to adapt the drive I/Os to the external control signals as shown in Figure 10.8. Set the switches to select the functions for each terminal.

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    10 Drive Start-Up Procedure

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 72

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    Page 73

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    Page 74

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Figure 10.8 Locations of Switches Table 10.8 I/O Terminals and Switches Functions

    Position Switch Terminal Function Default Setting

  • A Jumper switch S1 A1, A2 Sets terminals A1 and A2 to voltage or current output.
  • A1: V (voltage input) A2: I (current input)

  • B Jumper switch S5 FM, AM Sets terminals FM and AM to voltage or current output.
  • FM: V (voltage output) AM: V (voltage output)

  • C DIP switch S2 -
  • Enables and disables the termination resistor of these communications:

  • • APOGEE FLN
  • • BACnet
  • • MEMOBUS/Modbus
  • • Metasys N2
  • OFF

    ##### ◆ Control I/O Connections This section gives information

    Page 75

    circuit I/O signals.

    | |about the settings for the listed control| | |---|---|---| | | | |

  • • MFDI (terminals S1 to S7)
  • • MFDO (terminals M1 to M6)
  • • MFAI (terminals A1, A2)
  • • MFAO (terminals FM, AM)
  • • RS-485 communications (terminals D+, D-, AC)
  • ##### ■ Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode

    Close the circuit between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the sinking mode/sourcing mode and the internal/ external power supply for the MFDI terminals. The default setting for the drive is internal power supply sinking mode.

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.

    Mode Internal Power Supply (Terminal SN-SP) External 24 V Power Supply

    Sinking Mode (NPN)

    Sourcing Mode (PNP)

    ■ Set Input Signals for MFAI Terminals A1 and A2 Use terminals A1 and A2 to input a voltage or a current signal. Set the signal type as shown in Table 10.9.

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    Page 76

    | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    |10.9| |---|

    Figure

    Location of Jumper Switch S1

    | |

    Page 77

    |---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Page 78

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    70 YASKAWA TOEPC71061732G HV600 DRIVE INSTALLATION & PRIMARY OPERATION

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    10 Drive Start-Up Procedure

    Table 10.9 MFAI Terminals A1 and A2 Signal Settings

    |Terminal|Types of Input Signals|Jumper Switch S1|Parameter|Parameter| |---|---|---|---|---| |Terminal|Types of Input Signals|Jumper Switch S1|No.|Signal Level| |A1|Voltage input (Default)| |H3-01|0: 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)| |A1|Current input| |H3-01|2: 4 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    3: 0 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    | |A2|Voltage input| |H3-09|0: 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)| |A2|Current input (Default)| |H3-09|2: 4 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    3: 0 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
    |

    Note:

    Set H3-02, H3-10 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection, Terminal A2 Function Selection = Frequency Reference] to set A1 and A2 to frequency reference. The drive will add the analog input values together to make the frequency reference.

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    ##### ■ Set Output Signals for MFAO Terminals FM, AM Set the signal type for terminals

    Page 79

    and FM to voltage or current output. Use jumper switch S5 and H4-07, H4-08 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select, Terminal AM Signal Level Select] to set the signal type.

    |M| | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    Page 80

    | | |---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Figure 10.10 Location of Jumper Switch S5

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Terminal Types of Output Signals Jumper Switch S5

    | | | |---|---|

    Parameter No. Signal Level

    FM

    Voltage output (Default)

    H4-07

    0: 0 V to 10 V

    Current output 2: 4 mA to 20 mA

    AM

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 81

    | | | | | | | | |

    Voltage output (Default)

    0: 0 V to 10 V

    H4-08

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Current output 2: 4 mA to 20 mA

    ■ Switch ON Termination Resistor for RS-485 Communications When the drive is the last slave in these communications, set DIP switch S2 to the ON position:

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

  • • APOGEE FLN
  • • BACnet
  • • MEMOBUS/Modbus
  • • Metasys N2 This drive has a built-in termination resistor for the RS-485 interface.
  • | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Page 82

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 83

    ############## Figure 10.11 Location of DIP Switch S2 Table 10.10 RS-485 Communications Termination Resistor Setting

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    ################# DIP Switch S2 Description

    ON The built-in termination resistor is ON. OFF (Default) The built-in termination resistor is OFF.

    #### 11 Drive Control and Programming

    ◆ Selecting the Control Method This section gives information about these basic control methods:

  • • V/f Control
  • • EZ Open Loop Vector
  • |on|rol (EZOLV) for induction motors only| | |---|---|---| |on| | |

    Refer to the Technical Reference for information about speed feedback and Permanent Magnet/Synchronous Reluctance motor control methods. Use A1-02 [Control Method Selection] to select the most applicable control method for your application.

    Control Method A1-02 Setting Main Applications

    V/f 0

    EZOLV 8

  • • General variable-speed. Best method to operate more than one motor from one drive.
  • • When motor parameters are not available.
  • Page 84

  • • General variable-speed
  • • No high precision, no high speed response, and no speed feedback
  • ##### ◆ Auto-Tuning

    WARNING Injury to Personnel. Rotational Auto-Tuning rotates the motor at 50% or more of the motor rated frequency. Make sure that there are no issues related to safety in the area around the drive and motor. Increased motor frequency can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning, disconnect the load from the motor. The load can move suddenly and cause serious injury or death.

    Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters on the drive connected to the motor. You must input some parameters individually during Auto-Tuning.

  • 1. Select [Auto-Tuning] from the main menu to select the Auto-Tuning Mode.
  • 2. Use the information in Table 11.1 and Table 11.2 to set T1-01 [Auto-Tuning Mode Selection] and T4-01 [EZ Tuning Mode Selection].
  • 3. Push to start Auto-Tuning. Refer to the Technical Reference for more information about Auto-Tuning.
  • Table 11.1 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection

    |Type|T1-01|Application Conditions and Benefits|A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f]| |---|---|---|---| |Rotational Auto-Tuning|0|Recommended tuning mode for the most accurate results. Select this tuning mode when:

    • You can decouple the motor from the load.
    • You cannot decouple the motor from the load, but the motor load is less than 30%.
    |Yes| |Stationary Line-Line Resistance|2|Select this tuning mode when:

    • The drive and motor capacities are different.
    • The drive is in V/f Control.
    • You have replaced the drive and motor.
    |Yes|

    Table 11.2 EZ Tuning Mode Selection

    |Type|T4-01|Application Conditions and Benefits|A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV]| |---|---|---|---| |Motor Parameter Setting|0|Set the motor parameters.|Yes| |Line-to-Line Resistance|1|Select this tuning mode after you replace the drive, motor, and motor cables.|Yes|

    ##### ◆ Drive Parameters

    |Icon|Description| |---|---| |V/f|The parameter is available when operating the drive with V/f Control.| |OLV/PM|The parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector Control for PM.| |EZOLV|The parameter is available when operating the drive with EZ Open Loop Vector Control.| |RUN|The parameter can be changed settings during run.|

    Page 85

    Note: Gray icons identify parameters that are not available in the specified control method.

    Refer to the following table when setting the most important parameters.

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |A1-00 (0100) RUN|Language Selection|Sets the language for the keypad.

    0 : English
    1 : Japanese
    2 : German
    3 : French
    4 : Italian
    5 : Spanish
    6 : Portuguese


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |A1-02 (0102)|Control Method Selection|Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor. 0 : V/f Control 5 : PM Open Loop Vector 8 : EZ Vector Control

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |A1-03 (0103)|Initialize Parameters|Sets parameters to default values. 0 : No Initialization 1110 : User Initialization 2220 : 2-Wire Initialization 3330 : 3-Wire Initialization 3410 : HVAC Initialization

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |b1-01 (0180)|Frequency Reference Selection 1|Sets the input method for the frequency reference.

    0 : Keypad
    1 : Analog Input
    2 : Serial Communications
    3 : Option PCB


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |b1-02 (0181)|Run Command Selection 1|Sets the input method for the Run command.

    0 : Keypad
    1 : Digital Input
    2 : Serial Communications
    3 : Option PCB


    7 : AUTO Command Term Run
    8 : AUTO Command Serial Run
    9 : AUTO Command Option Run


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |b1-03 (0182)|Stopping Method Selection|Sets the method to stop the motor after removing a Run command or entering a Stop command.

    0 : Ramp to Stop
    1 : Coast to Stop
    2 : DC Injection Braking to Stop
    3 : Coast to Stop with Timer


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |b1-04 (0183)|Reverse Operation Selection|Sets the reverse operation function. Disable reverse operation in fan or pump applications where reverse rotation is dangerous.

    0 : Reverse Enabled
    1 : Reverse Disabled


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C1-01 (0200) RUN|Acceleration Time 1|Sets the length of time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C1-02 (0201) RUN|Deceleration Time 1|Sets the length of time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C2-01 (020B)|S-Curve Time @ Start of Accel|Sets the S-curve acceleration time at start.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C2-02 (020C)|S-Curve Time @ End of Accel|Sets the S-curve acceleration time at completion.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C2-03 (020D)|S-Curve Time @ Start of Decel|Sets the S-curve deceleration time at start.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C2-04 (020E)|S-Curve Time @ End of Decel|Sets the S-curve deceleration time at completion.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |C6-02 (0224)|Carrier Frequency Selection|Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive.

    1 : 2.0 kHz
    2 : 5.0 kHz
    3 : 8.0 kHz
    4 : 10.0 kHz
    5 : 12.5 kHz


    7 : Swing PWM1 (Audible Sound 1)
    8 : Swing PWM2 (Audible Sound 2)
    9 : Swing PWM3 (Audible Sound 3)


    A : Swing PWM4 (Audible Sound 4)
    B : Leakage Current Rejection PWM F : User Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |d1-01 to d1-08 (0280 - 0287) RUN|Reference 1 to 8|Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection].

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |d1-17 (0292) RUN|Jog Reference|Sets the Jog frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. Set H1-xx = 6 [MFDI Function Selection = Jog Reference Selection] to use the Jog frequency reference.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |d2-01 (0289)|Frequency Reference Upper Limit|Sets maximum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is 100%.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |d2-02 (028A)|Frequency Reference Lower Limit|Sets minimum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is 100%.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E1-01 (0300)|Input AC Supply Voltage|Sets the drive input voltage.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |E1-04 (0303)|Maximum Output Frequency|Sets the maximum output frequency for the V/f pattern.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E1-05 (0304)|Maximum Output Voltage|Sets the maximum output voltage for the V/f pattern.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E1-06 (0305)|Base Frequency|Sets the base frequency for the V/f pattern.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E1-09 (0308)|Minimum Output Frequency|Sets the minimum output frequency for the V/f pattern.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E2-01 (030E)|Motor Rated Current (FLA)|Sets the motor rated current in amps.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |E2-11 (0318)|Motor Rated Power|Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection].

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |

    Page 86

    |H1-01 - H1-07 (0438, 0439, 0400 0404)|Terminal S1 to S7 Function Selection|Sets the functions for MFDI terminals S1 to S7.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H2-01 (040B)|Term M1-M2 Function Selection|Sets the function for MFDO terminal M1-M2.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H2-02 (040C)|Term M3-M4 Function Selection|Sets the function for MFDO terminal M3-M4.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H2-03 (040D)|Term M5-M6 Function Selection|Sets the function for MFDO terminal M5-M6.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-01 (0410)|Terminal A1 Signal Level Select|Sets the input signal level for MFAI terminal A1. 0 : 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0)

    2 : 4 to 20 mA
    3 : 0 to 20 mA


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-02 (0434)|Terminal A1 Function Selection|Sets the function for MFAI terminal A1.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-03 (0411) RUN|Terminal A1 Gain Setting|Sets the gain of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-04 (0412) RUN|Terminal A1 Bias Setting|Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-09 (0417)|Terminal A2 Signal Level Select|Sets the input signal level for MFAI terminal A2. 0 : 0-10V (LowLim=0)

    2 : 4 to 20 mA
    3 : 0 to 20 mA


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-10 (0418)|Terminal A2 Function Selection|Sets the function for MFAI terminal A2.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-11 (0419) RUN|Terminal A2 Gain Setting|Sets the gain of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A2.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-12 (041A) RUN|Terminal A2 Bias Setting|Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A2.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-13 (041B)|Analog Input FilterTime Constant|Sets the time constant for primary delay filters on MFAI terminals.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H3-14 (041C)|Analog Input Terminal Enable Sel|Sets which terminal or terminals to enable when H1-xx = C [MFDI Function Selection = Analog Terminal Enable Selection] is activated.

    1 : Terminal A1 only
    2 : Terminal A2 only
    3 : Terminals A1 and A2


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-01 (041D)|Terminal FM Analog Output Select|Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal FM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |H4-02 (041E) RUN|Terminal FM Analog Output Gain|Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-03 (041F) RUN|Terminal FM Analog Output Bias|Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-04 (0420)|Terminal AM Analog Output Select|Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal AM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-05 (0421) RUN|Terminal AM Analog Output Gain|Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-06 (0422) RUN|Terminal AM Analog Output Bias|Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-07 (0423)|Terminal FM Signal Level Select|Sets the MFAO terminal FM output signal level. 0 : 0 to 10 Vdc 2 : 4 to 20 mA

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |H4-08 (0424)|Terminal AM Signal Level Select|Sets the MFAO terminal AM output signal level. 0 : 0 to 10 Vdc 2 : 4 to 20 mA

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |L1-01 (0480)|Motor Overload (oL1) Protection|Sets the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.

    0 : Disabled
    1 : Variable Torque 4 : PM Variable Torque


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |L1-02 (0481)|Motor Overload Protection Time|Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |L3-04 (0492)|Stall Prevention during Decel|Sets the method that the drive will use to prevent overvoltage faults when decelerating.

    0 : Disabled
    1 : General Purpose
    2 : Intelligent (Ignore Decel Ramp) 4 : Overexcitation/High Flux


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    | |o1-58 (3125)|Motor Power Unit Selection|Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the motor rated power.

    0 : kW
    1 : HP


    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |

    #### 12 UL Standards

    Figure 12.1 UL/cUL Mark

    The UL/cUL Mark identifies that this product conforms to rigid safety standards. This mark appears on products in the United States and Canada. It shows UL approval, which identifies that the product is in compliance with safety standards after careful inspection and assessment. You must use UL Listed or UL Recognized parts for all primary components that are built into electrical equipment that has UL approval.

    This product has been tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C *1, and has been verified to be in compliance with UL standards.

    *1 Models 2143xV, 2169xV, and 4156xVare in compliance with UL61800-5-1.

    Page 87

    Machines and devices integrated with this product must satisfy the following conditions for compliance with UL standards.

    ◆ Area of Use Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less.

    ■ Ambient Temperature Setting Maintain the ambient temperature within the following ranges according to the enclosure type.

  • • IP20/ULType 1 and IP55/ULType 12: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
  • • IP20/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
  • ◆ Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques Refer to Three-Phase 208 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 34 and Three-Phase 480 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 36 for the recommended wire gauges and tightening torques of the main circuit terminals. Comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where the drive is used.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Only connect 12-pulse output, 18-pulse output, or DC power input to terminals - and +1. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious injury or death from fire.

    ############## Note:

  • •The recommended wires for the main circuit are 600 V, Class 2 vinyl-insulated copper wires with a continuous maximum operating temperature of 75 °C (167 °F). Assume these conditions:
  • –Ambient temperature: 40 °C (104 °F) or lower
  • –Wiring distance: 100 m (3281 ft) or shorter
  • –Normal Duty Rated current value
  • •For drive models 2075 to 2273 and 4077 to 4302, use UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals on the drive main circuit terminals. Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer and make sure that the terminals are correctly connected.
  • ◆ Ferrules and Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals To comply with UL standards on drive models 2075 to 2273 and 4077 to 4302, use UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals. Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer to crimp the closed-loop crimp terminal. Yaskawa recommends closed-loop crimp terminals from PANDUIT Corp. Install UL Recognized heat-shrinkable tubes to the closed-loop crimp terminals. If you do not use the tubes with the closed-loop crimp terminals, the insulating distance will be too short and it can cause short circuits.

    A - UL Recognized heat-shrinkable tube Comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where the drive is used. Refer to Table 12.1 to select ferrules and crimp terminals as specified by drive model and wire gauge.

    Note:

    To comply with UL standards, use UL Listed vinylcoated insulated copper wires for operation with a continuous maximum permitted temperature of 75 °C at 600 V.

    ############## Table 12.1 Ferrules and Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Type LCA|Type P|Type S| |2011|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A|

    Page 88

    |2011|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2011|-, +1|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2011| |12|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |2017|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|12|F81-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2017|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2017|-, +1|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2017| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |2024|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2024|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2024|-, +1|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2024| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |2031|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2031|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2031|-, +1|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2031| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |2046|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8|F83-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2046|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|6|F84-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2046|-, +1|6|F84-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2046| |8|N/A|LCA8-14-L|P8-14R-Q|S8-14R-Q| |2059|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2059|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2059|-, +1|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |2059| |6|N/A|LCA6-14-L|P6-14R-E|S6-14R-E| |2075|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E| |2075|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3 or 2|N/A|LCA4-56-L or LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X *2|S2-56R-X *2| |2075|-, +1|2|N/A|LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X|S2-56R-X| |2075| |6|N/A|LCA6-56-L|P6-56R-E|S6-56R-E| |2088|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

    |3 or 2|N/A|LCA4-56-L or LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X *2|S2-56R-X *2| |2088|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2|N/A|LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X|S2-56R-X| |2088|-, +1|1|N/A|LCA1-56-E|N/A|S2-56R-X| |2088| |6|N/A|LCA6-56-L|P6-56R-E|S6-56R-E| |2114|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0|N/A|LCA1/0-56-X|N/A|S1/0-56R-X| |2114|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0|N/A|LCA1/0-56-X|N/A|S1/0-56R-X| |2114|-, +1|2/0|N/A|LCA2/0-56-X|N/A|S2/0-56R-X| |2114| |6|N/A|LCA6-56-L|P6-56R-E|S6-56R-E|

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Type LCA|Type P|Type S| |2143|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2/0|N/A|LCA2/0-56-X|N/A|S2/0-56R-X|

    Page 89

    |2143|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0|N/A|LCA3/0-56-X|N/A|S3/0-56R-5| |2143|-, +1|3/0|N/A|LCA3/0-56-X|N/A|S3/0-56R-5| |2143| |4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E| |2169|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|3/0|N/A|LCA3/0-56-X|N/A|S3/0-56R-5| |2169|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4/0|N/A|LCA4/0-56-X|N/A|S4/0-56R-5| |2169|-, +1|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-56-X|N/A|S1/0-56R-X| |2169| |4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E| |2211|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |2211|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |2211|-, +1|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |2211| |3 or 2|N/A|LCA4-12-L or LCA2-12-Q|P2-12R-X *2|S2-12R-X *2| |2273|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

    |2/0 × 2|N/A|LCA2/0-12-X|N/A|S2/0-76R-X or S2/0-12R-X| |2273|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2/0 × 2|N/A|LCA2/0-12-X|N/A|S2/0-76R-X or S2/0-12R-X| |2273|-, +1|3/0 × 2|N/A|LCA3/0-12-X|N/A|S3/0-76R-5 or S3/0-12R-5| |2273| |2|N/A|LCA2-12-Q|P2-12R-X|S2-12R-X| |4005|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4005|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4005|-, +1|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4005| |14|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4008|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4008|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4008|-, +1|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4008| |14|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4011|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4011|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4011|-, +1|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4011| |12|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4014|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|14|F80-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4014|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|12|F81-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4014|-, +1|12|F81-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4014| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A|

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Type LCA|Type P|Type S| |4021|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4021|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4021|-, +1|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4021| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4027|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|10|F82-10|N/A|N/A|N/A|

    Page 90

    |4027|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4027|-, +1|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4027| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4034|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4034|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4034|-, +1|8|F83-12|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4034| |10|N/A|LCA10-14-L|P10-14R-L|N/A| |4040|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|8|F83-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4040|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|8|F83-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4040|-, +1|6|F84-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4040| |8|N/A|LCA8-14-L|P8-14R-Q|S8-14R-Q| |4052|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|6|F84-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4052|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|6|F84-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4052|-, +1|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4052| |8|N/A|LCA8-14-L|P8-14R-Q|S8-14R-Q| |4065|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4065|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4065|-, +1|4|F85-18|N/A|N/A|N/A| |4065| |6|N/A|LCA6-14-L|P6-14R-E|S6-14R-E| |4077|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

    |4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E| |4077|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3 or 2|N/A|LCA4-56-L or LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X *2|S2-56R-X *2| |4077|-, +1|2|N/A|LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X|S2-56R-X| |4077| |6|N/A|LCA6-56-L|P6-56R-E|S6-56R-E| |4096|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2|N/A|LCA2-56-Q|P2-56R-X|S2-56R-X| |4096|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1|N/A|LCA1-56-E|N/A|S2-56R-X| |4096|-, +1|1|N/A|LCA1-56-E|N/A|S2-56R-X| |4096| |6|N/A|LCA6-56-L|P6-56R-E|S6-56R-E| |4124|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0|N/A|LCA1/0-56-X|N/A|S1/0-56R-X| |4124|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|2/0|N/A|LCA2/0-56-X|N/A|S2/0-56R-X| |4124|-, +1|2/0|N/A|LCA2/0-56-X|N/A|S2/0-56R-X| |4124| |4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E|

    |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.|Crimp Terminal Part Number Manufacturer: PANDUIT Corp.| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Model|Terminals|Recommended Gauge

    AWG, kcmil|Ferrule *1|Type LCA|Type P|Type S| |4156|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|2/0|N/A|LCA2/0-56-X|N/A|S2/0-56R-X| |4156|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0|N/A|LCA3/0-56-X|N/A|S3/0-56R-5| |4156|-, +1|4/0|N/A|LCA4/0-56-X|N/A|S4/0-56R-5| |4156| |4|N/A|LCA4-56-L|P4-56R-E|S4-56R-E| |4180|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X|

    Page 91

    |4180|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |4180|-, +1|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |4180| |3 or 2|N/A|LCA4-12-L or LCA2-12-Q|P2-12R-X *2|S2-12R-X *2| |4240|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

    |1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |4240|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|1/0 × 2|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X| |4240|-, +1|2/0 × 2|N/A|LCA2/0-12-X|N/A|S2/0-76R-X or S2/0-12R-X| |4240| |2|N/A|LCA2-12-Q|P2-12R-X|S2-12R-X| |4302|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3|3/0 × 2|N/A|LCA3/0-12-X|N/A|S3/0-12R-5| |4302|U/T1, V/T2, W/T3|3/0 × 2|N/A|LCA3/0-12-X|N/A|S3/0-12R-5| |4302|-, +1|4/0 × 2|N/A|LCA4/0-12-X|N/A|S4/0-12R-5| |4302| |1/0|N/A|LCA1/0-12-X|N/A|S1/0-12R-X|

  • *1 Use recommended ferrule or bare wire.
  • *2 The recommended wire gauge for this part is AWG 2.
  • ##### ◆ Short Circuit Protection Requirements for UL Listing

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. After the input protective device trips, do not immediately energize the drive or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

    ■ UL Compliance Install one of the types of short circuit protection devices in Table 12.2 or Table 12.3 to comply with UL 508C *1.

    *1 Models 2143xV, 2169xV, and 4156xVare in compliance with UL61800-5-1. Semiconductor protective type fuses are recommended, but the tables also show alternative short circuit protection devices. Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Ratings

  • • Maximum MCCB rating is 250% of the drive full load output amp (FLA) rating.
  • • When you use MCCBs you must mount the drive in a ventilated enclosure according to the minimum enclosure volume specified in this document.
  • Note: When you use MCCBs, current limiting type are recommended, but not required.

    Semiconductor Fuse Ratings When you use semiconductor fuses as UL listed drive protection, the drives and fuses must be in the same enclosure.

    Non-Semiconductor Fuse Ratings Maximum CC, J, or T fuse rating is 175% of the drive full load output amp (FLA) rating.

    Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) The maximum SCCR provided by drive and fuse, or drive and MCCB combinations in this document, is 100,000 RMS symmetrical amps.

  • • 240 V models: Use the protection specified in this document to prepare the drive for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amps and not more than 240 Vac.
  • • 480 V models: Use the protection specified in this document to prepare the drive for use on a circuit capable of
  • Page 92

    delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amps and not more than 480 Vac. Electric Code Compliance The user must provide short circuit protection to protect input branch circuits as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), the Canadian Electric Code, Part 1 (CEC), and local codes.

    Required Short Circuit Protection

  • Table 12.2 Required Short Circuit Protection for HV600 AC Drives (240 V Class)
  • *1 When you use semiconductor fuses as UL listed drive protection, the drives and fuses must be in the same enclosure.
  • *2 Class T fuses are fast-acting (non‐time-delay) only. You can substitute a Class J time-delay fuse for a Class J non‐time-delay fuse.
  • Table 12.3 Required Short Circuit Protection for HV600 AC Drives (480 V Class)
  • |Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |Drive Catalog Code

    HV60U|Semiconductor Fuse *1 Part Number Manufacturer: Eaton/ Bussmann|Class CC, J, or T Fuse *2 Maximum Amps|MCCB Maximum Amps|MCP Part Number Manufacturer: Schneider|Enclosure Volume Minimum (in3)| |2011|FWH‐40B|17.5|25|HLL36030M71|3056| |2017|FWH‐45B|25|40|HLL36030M71|3056| |2024|FWH‐80B|40|60|HLL36050M72|3056| |2031|FWH‐125B|50|75|HLL36050M72|3056| |2046|FWH‐125B|80|110|HLL36100M73|5520| |2059|FWH‐175B|100|125|HLL36100M73|5520| |2075|FWH‐200B|125|175|HLL36150M74|5520| |2088|FWH‐225A|150|200|HLL36150M74|5520| |2114|FWH‐225A|200|250|HLL36150M74|5520| |2143|FWH‐250A|250|350|JLL36250M75|14657| |2169|FWH‐275A|250|400|JLL36250M75|14657| |2211|FWH‐600A|350|500|LLL36400M37X|14657| |2273|FWH‐800A|450|600|LLL36400M37X|14657|

    |Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Drive Catalog Code

    HV60U|Semiconductor Fuse *1

    Part Number Manufacturer: Eaton/ Bussmann|Class CC, J, or T Fuse *2

    Maximum Amps|MCCB Maximum Amps|MCP Part Number Manufacturer: Schneider|Enclosure Volume Minimum (in3)|Enclosure Volume Minimum (in3)| |Drive Catalog Code

    HV60U|Semiconductor Fuse *1

    Part Number Manufacturer: Eaton/ Bussmann|Class CC, J, or T Fuse *2

    Maximum Amps|MCCB Maximum Amps|MCP Part Number Manufacturer: Schneider|External Heatsink|Internal Heatsink| |4005|FWH‐25A14F|8|15|HLL36030M71|3056|3056| |4006|FWH‐30A14F|9|15|HLL36030M71|3056|3056| |4008|FWH‐30A14F|12|15|HLL36030M71|3056|3056| |4011|FWH‐40B|17.5|25|HLL36030M71|3056|3056| |4014|FWH‐45B|20|35|HLL36030M71|3056|3056| |4021|FWH‐60B|35|50|HLL36030M71|3056|3056|

    Page 93

    |4027|FWH‐80B|45|60|HLL36050M72|3056|3056| |4034|FWH‐100B|60|80|HLL36050M72|3056|3056| |4040|FWH‐125B|70|100|HLL36100M73|5520|5520|

    |Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Protected Enclosure Not Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required|Ventilated Protected Enclosure Required| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Drive Catalog Code

    HV60U|Semiconductor Fuse *1

    Part Number Manufacturer: Eaton/ Bussmann|Class CC, J, or T Fuse *2

    Maximum Amps|MCCB Maximum Amps|MCP Part Number Manufacturer: Schneider|Enclosure Volume Minimum (in3)|Enclosure Volume Minimum (in3)| |Drive Catalog Code

    HV60U|Semiconductor Fuse *1

    Part Number Manufacturer: Eaton/ Bussmann|Class CC, J, or T Fuse *2

    Maximum Amps|MCCB Maximum Amps|MCP Part Number Manufacturer: Schneider|External Heatsink|Internal Heatsink| |4052|FWH‐150B|90|125|HLL36100M73|5520|5520| |4065|FWH‐200B|110|150|HLL36100M73|5520|5520| |4077|FWH‐225A|125|175|HLL36100M73|5520|5520| |4096|FWH‐225A|150|225|HLL36150M74|5520|5520| |4124|FWH‐225A|200|300|JLL36250M75|5520|5520| |4156|FWH‐325A|250|350|JLL36250M75|21582|14657| |4180|FWH‐500A|300|450|JLL36250M75|52800 *3|14657| |4240|FWH‐600A|400|600|LLL36400M37X|52800 *3|14657| |4302|FWH‐700A|500|700|LLL36400M37X|52800 *3|52800|

  • *1 When you use semiconductor fuses as UL listed drive protection, the drives and fuses must be in the same enclosure.
  • *2 Class T fuses are fast-acting (non‐time-delay) only. You can substitute a Class J time-delay fuse for a Class J non‐time-delay fuse.
  • *3 External heatsink installations on models 4180, 4240, and 4302 require a heatsink shroud and filter.
  • ##### ◆ Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

    You must provide low voltage wiring as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), the Canadian Electric Code, Part I (CEC), and local codes. Yaskawa recommends the NEC class 1 circuit conductor. Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply.

    Table 12.4 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supplies

    |Input/Output|Terminals|Power Supply Specifications| |---|---|---| |Digital input|S1 to S7, SN, SC, SP|Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive. Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply.| |Analog input|A1 to A2, AC, +V|Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive. Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply.| |Analog output|FM, AM, AC|Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive.| |Safe disable input|H1, H2, HC|Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive. Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply.| |Serial communication input/output|D+, D-, AC|Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive. Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external power supply.| |24 Vexternal power supply input/output|PS, AC, +P|Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply.|

    Page 94

    ◆ Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection The drive motor overload and overheat protection function complies with the National Electric Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electric Code, Part I (CEC). Set the Motor Rated Current and L1-01 through L1-04 [Motor Overload Protection Select] correctly to enable motor overload and overheat protection. Refer to the control method and set the motor rated current with E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)], E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)], or E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].

    ##### ■ E2-01: Motor Rated Current (FLA)

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |E2-01 (030E)|Motor Rated Current (FLA)|Sets the motor rated current in amps.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |Determined by o2-04 (10% to 200% of the drive rated current)|

    ############## Note:

  • •If E2-01 < E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current] the drive will detect oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error].
  • •The default settings and setting ranges are in these units:
  • –0.01 A: 2011 to 2046, 4005 to 4014
  • –0.1 A: 2059 to 2273, 4021 to 4302
  • The value set for E2-01 becomes the reference value for motor protection and the torque limit. Enter the motor rated current as written on the motor nameplate. The value of E2-01 is automatically set to the value input for “Motor Rated Current” by the Auto-Tuning process.

    ##### ■ E5-03: PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |E5-03 (032B)|PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)|Sets the PM motor rated current (FLA).

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |Determined by o2-04 (10% to 200% of the drive rated current)|

    Note: When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.

  • •0.01 A: 2011 to 2046, 4005 to 4014
  • •0.1 A: 2059 to 2273, 4021 to 4302
  • The drive automatically sets E5-03 to the value input for “PM Motor Rated Current” after you do these types of AutoTuning:

  • • PM Motor Parameter Settings
  • • PM Stationary Auto-Tuning
  • • PM StaTun for Stator Resistance
  • • PM Rotational Auto-Tuning
  • Page 95

    ##### ■ E9-06: Motor Rated Current (FLA)

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |E9-06 (11E9)|Motor Rated Current (FLA)|Sets the motor rated current in amps.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |Determined by E9-01 and o2-04

    (10% to 200% of the drive rated current)|

    Note: When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.

  • •0.01 A: 2011 to 2046, 4005 to 4014
  • •0.1 A: 2059 to 2273, 4021 to 4302
  • The setting value of E9-06 is the reference value for motor protection. Enter the motor rated current shown on the motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E9-06 to the value input for “Motor Rated Current”.

    ##### ■ L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |L1-01 (0480)|Motor Overload (oL1) Protection|Sets the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |Determined by A1-02 (0 - 4)|

    This parameter enables and disables the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.

    The cooling capability of the motor changes when the speed control range of the motor changes. Use an electronic thermal protector that aligns with the permitted load characteristics of the motor to select motor protection. The electronic thermal protector of the drive uses these items to calculate motor overload tolerance and supply overload protection for the motor:

  • • Output Current
  • • Output Frequency
  • • Motor thermal characteristics
  • • Time characteristics If the drive detects motor overload, the drive will trigger an oL1 [Motor Overload] and stop the drive output. Set H2-01 = 1F [Term M1-M2 Function Selection = Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)] to set a motor overload alarm. If the motor overload level is more than 90% of the oL1 detection level, the output terminal turns ON and triggers an overload alarm.
  • ########### 0 : Disabled

    Disable motor protection when motor overload protection is not necessary or when the drive is operating more than one motor. Refer to Figure 12.2 for an example of the circuit configuration to connect more than one motor to one drive.

    Figure 12.2 Protection Circuit Configuration to Connect More than One Motor to One Drive

    NOTICE When you connect more than one motor to one drive or when the motor amp rating is higher than the drive amp rating, set L1-01 =0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled] and install thermal overload relays for each motor. The electronic thermal protection of the drive will not function and it can cause damage to the motor.

    ############ 1 : Variable TorqueUse this setting for general-purpose motors with a 60 Hz base frequency.

    Page 96

    The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the ability of the motor to cool decreases in the low speed range. The overload tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the electronic thermal protector. This provides motor overheat protection from low speed to high speed across the full speed range.

    |Load Tolerance|Cooling Capability|Overload Characteristics (at 100% motor load)| |---|---|---| | |This motor is designed to operate with commercial line power. Operate at a 60 Hz base frequency to maximize the motor cooling ability.|If the motor operates at frequencies less than 60 Hz, the drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop.|

  • 4 : PM Variable Torque Use this setting for PM motors with derated torque characteristics.
  • The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the ability of the motor to cool decreases in the low speed range. The overload tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the electronic thermal protector. This provides motor overheat protection from low speed to high speed across the full speed range.

    |Load Tolerance|Cooling Capability|Overload Characteristics (at 100% motor load)| |---|---|---| | |This motor is designed to withstand increased temperatures during continuous operation at rated speed and rated torque.|If the motor operates continuously at lower speed than rated rotation speed at more than 100% torque, the drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop.|

    ##### ■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |L1-02 (0481)|Motor Overload Protection Time|Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |1.0 min (0.1 - 5.0 min)|

    Set the overload tolerance time to the length of time that the motor can operate at 150% load from continuous operation at 100% load. When the motor operates at 150% load continuously for 1 minute after continuous operation at 100% load (hot start), the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector. Figure 12.3 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time. Motor overload protection operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start. This example shows a general-purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1-02 set to 1.0 min.

  • • Cold start Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when the overload occurs immediately after starting operation from a complete stop.
  • • Hot start Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when overload occurs from continuous operation below the motor rated current.
  • | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Figure 12.3 Protection Operation Time for a General-purpose Motor at Rated Output Frequency

    Page 97

    ##### ■ L1-03: Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |L1-03 (0482)|Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select|Sets drive operation when the PTC input signal entered into the drive is at the oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)] detection level.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |3 (0 - 3)|

  • 0 : Ramp to Stop
  • The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON and MBMC turns OFF.

  • 1 : Coast to Stop
  • The output turns OFF and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF.

  • 2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
  • The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF.

  • 3 : Alarm Only The keypad shows oH3, and operation continues. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] turns ON.
  • ##### ■ L1-04: Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select

    |No. (Hex.)|Name|Description|Default (Range)| |---|---|---|---| |L1-04 (0483)|Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select|Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)] detection level.

    V/f OLV/PM EZOLV

    |1 (0 - 2)|

    ########### 0 : Ramp to Stop

    The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MBMC turns OFF.

    ########### 1 : Coast to Stop

    The output turns OFF and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF.

    ########### 2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)

    The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF.

    Page 98

    #### 13 European Standards

    Figure 13.1 CE Mark The CE Mark identifies that the product meets environmental and safety standards in the European Union. Products manufactured, sold, or imported in the European Union must display the CE Mark. European Union standards include standards for electrical appliances (Low Voltage Directive), standards for electrical noise (EMC Directive), and standards for machinery (Machinery Directive). This product displays the CE Mark in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive, the EMC Directive, and the Machinery Directive.

  • Table 13.1 Harmonized Standards
  • *1 Refer to “EU Declaration of Conformity” for the year of the Harmonized Standards. The customer must display the CE Mark on the final device containing this product. Customers must verify that the final device complies with EU standards.

  • Table 13.2 Other Applicable Standards
  • |European Directive|Harmonized Standards| |---|---| |Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU|EN 61800-5-1 *1| |EMC Directive 2014/30/EU|EN 61800-3 *1| |Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC|• EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e (Cat.3))
    • EN IEC 62061(SIL3) *1
    • EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3) *1
    | |Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances (RoHS) 2011/65/EU|EN IEC 63000 *1|

    |European Directive|Applicable Standards| |---|---| |EU ErP Directive 2009/125/EC|The drive meets the requirements for IE2 efficiency according to the European regulation 2019/1781.

    The losses and the efficiency were measured in accordance with the requirements of IEC 61800-9-2.|

    ◆ EU Declaration of Conformity Go to www.yaskawa.com and search for “EU Declaration of Conformity” to get an original copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity. Yaskawa declares that this product complies with the following directives and standards.

    ◆ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance It has been confirmed that this product complies with the CE Low Voltage Directive by conducting a test according to IEC/EN 61800-5-1. The following conditions must be satisfied for machines and devices incorporating this product to comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive.

  • ■ Area of Use Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less.
  • ■ Guarding Against Debris
  • When you install IP20/UL Open Type drives (model: 2xxxxB, 4xxxxB), use an enclosure panel that does not let unwanted material enter the drive from above or below.

  • ■ Electrical Installation Refer to Figure 13.2 for an example of a drive that is wired to comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive.
  • | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 99

    ############## Figure 13.2 Wiring Diagram for CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

  • *1 For circuit protection, the main circuit is separated from the surface case that can touch the main circuit.
  • *2 To comply with LVD standard requirement, set L8-05 = 1 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel = Enabled] to protect the drive from the high current caused by Input Phase Loss condition.
  • *3 Use terminals - and +1 to connect options to the drive.
  • WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that the polarity is correct before you send a Run command. If the drive incorrectly detects the polarity, the drive can rotate in the direction opposite of the Run command and cause serious injury or death.

  • *4 Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
  • *5 The control circuit is a Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit. Separate this circuit from other circuits with reinforced insulation. Make sure to connect the Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit as specified.
  • *6 Reinforced insulation separates the output terminals from other circuits. When the drive output is 250 Vac 1 A maximum or 30 Vdc 1 A maximum, you can also connect circuits that are not Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuits.
  • ##### ■ Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Only connect 12-pulse output, 18-pulse output, or DC power input to terminals - and +1. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious injury or death from fire. Refer to Three-Phase 208 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 34 and Three-Phase 480 V Class Wire Gauges and Torques on page 36 for the recommended wire gauges and tightening torques of the main circuit terminals.

    Note: The recommended wires for the main circuit are 600 V, Class 2 vinyl-insulated wires with a drive continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75 °C (167 °F). Assume these conditions:

  • •Ambient temperature: 40 °C (104 °F) or lower
  • •Wiring distance: 100 m (3281 ft) or shorter
  • •Normal Duty Rated current value
  • ##### ■ Connect a Fuse and a GFCI to the Input Side (Primary Side)

    The drive circuit protection must comply with IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 for protection against a short circuit in the internal circuitry. Yaskawa recommends connecting a semiconductor protection fuse and a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) on the input side for branch circuit protection.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. After the drive blows a fuse or trips a GFCI, do not immediately energize the drive or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.

    ############## Table 13.3 Factory-Recommended Semiconductor Protection Fuses (208 V Class)

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |2011|FWH-40B| |2017|FWH-50B| |2024|FWH-80B| |2031|FWH-100B|

    Page 100

    |2046|FWH-125B| |2059|FWH-225A| |2075|FWH-225A|

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |2088|FWH-225A| |2114|FWH-225A| |2143|FWH-250A| |2169|FWH-275A| |2211|FWH-600A| |2273|FWH-800A|

    *1 When you use semiconductor protection fuses as UL listed drive protection, the drives and fuses must be in the same enclosure.

    ############## Table 13.4 Factory-Recommended Semiconductor Protection Fuses (480 V Class)

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |4005|FWH-25A14F| |4008|FWH-30A14F| |4011|FWH-40B| |4014|FWH-50B| |4021|FWH-60B|

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |4027|FWH-80B| |4034|FWH-100B| |4040|FWH-125B| |4052|FWH-150B| |4065|FWH-225A|

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |4077|FWH-225A| |4096|FWH-225A|

    Page 101

    |4124|FWH-225A| |4156|FWH-325A|

    |Drive Model|Semiconductor Protection Fuse *1 Model Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann| |---|---| |4180|FWH-500A| |4240|FWH-600A| |4302|FWH-700A|

    *1 When you use semiconductor protection fuses as UL listed drive protection, the drives and fuses must be in the same enclosure.

  • Table 13.5 Factory-Recommended GFCI (208 V Class)
  • Table 13.6 Factory-Recommended GFCI (480 V Class)
  • |Drive Model|GFCI Model Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric|Rated Current A|Rated Leakage Current mA| |---|---|---|---| |2011|NV32-SV|20|500| |2017|NV32-SV|32|500| |2024|NV63-SV|50|500| |2031|NV63-SV|60|500| |2046|NV125-SV|100|500| |2059|NV125-SV|125|500| |2075|NV250-SV|150|500| |2088|NV250-SV|175|500| |2114|NV250-SV|225|500| |2143|NV400-SW|300|500| |2169|NV400-SW|350|500| |2211|NV630-SEW|500|500| |2273|NV630-SEW|500|500|

    |Drive Model|GFCI Model Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric|Rated Current A|Rated Leakage Current mA| |---|---|---|---| |4005|NV32-SV|15|500| |4008|NV32-SV|15|500| |4011|NV32-SV|20|500| |4014|NV32-SV|30|500| |4021|NV63-SV|50|500|

    Page 102

    |4027|NV63-SV|63|500| |4034|NV63-SV|63|500| |4040|NV125-SV|100|500| |4052|NV125-SV|125|500| |4065|NV125-SV|125|500| |4077|NV250-SV|150|500| |4096|NV250-SV|200|500| |4124|NV250-SV|250|500| |4156|NV400-SEW|300|500| |4180|NV400-SEW|350|500| |4240|NV630-SW|500|500| |4302|NV630-SW|600|500|

    ##### ◆ EMC Directive

    Drives with built-in EMC filters were tested in accordance with European standard IEC/EN 61800-3, and comply with the EMC Directive.

    ##### ■ Install a Drive to Conform to the EMC Directive

    Use this procedure to install drives that comply with the EMC Directive when the drive is a single unit or installed in a larger device.

  • 1. Install the drive on a grounded metal plate.
  • 2. Wire the drive and motor.
  • 3. Ground the wire shielding on the drive side and motor side.
  • A - Drive
  • B - 100 m (328 ft) maximum
  • C - Motor
  • D - Metal conduit E - Grounding wire

    Figure 13.3 Wiring the Drive and Motor Note:

  • •Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit.
  • •The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 100 m (328 ft). Keep the wire as short as possible.
  • •Keep the grounding wire as short as possible.
  • Page 103

  • Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate.
  • Note: Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications and local safety standards.

  • A - Braided shield cable
  • B - Metal plate
  • C - Cable clamp (conductive)

    Figure 13.4 Ground the shield

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |---| | |

    Page 104

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|

    | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

  • A - Grounding surface (Remove any paint or sealant.)
  • B - Metal plate
  • C - Drive
  • D - Shielded wire
  • E - Motor
  • F - Motor cable
  • G - Cable clamp
  • H - Grounding wire
  • Figure 13.5 Install a Drive with a Built-in EMC Filter Ground Wiring

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of the drives to comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter. If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.

    Enable the Internal EMC Filter Move the screws to turn ON and OFF (enable and disable) the EMC filter.

    Make sure that you apply a symmetric grounding network and install the both screws in the ON position to enable the built-in EMC filter in compliance with the EMC Directive. The default position of the EMC filter switch screws is the OFF position.

    Page 105

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive, wait for the time specified on the warning label, and check the drive for dangerous voltages before you remove covers or touch EMC filter screws. If you touch the screws when there are dangerous voltages, it will cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of the drives to comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter. If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Connect the ground cable correctly. If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.

    NOTICE To disable the internal EMC filter, move the screws from ON to OFF and then tighten to the specified torque. If you fully remove the screws or tighten the screws to an incorrect torque, it can cause drive failure.

    NOTICE Move the EMC switch screw or screws to the OFF position for networks that are not symmetrically grounded. If the screws are not in the correct position, it can cause damage to the drive.

    ############## Figure 13.6 Symmetric Grounding

    NOTICE Damage to Equipment. When you use the drive with a non-grounding, high-resistance grounding, or asymmetricgrounding network, put the EMC Filter screw or screws in the OFF position to disable the built-in EMC filter. If you do not disable the built-in EMC filter, it will cause damage to the drive.

    Table 13.7 shows asymmetric grounding networks.

    Table 13.7 Asymmetric Grounding

    |Type of Grounding|Diagram| |---|---| |Grounded at the corner of the delta connection| | |Grounded at the middle of the side| |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    13 European Standards

    Page 106

    Type of Grounding Diagram

    Single-phase, grounded at the end point

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | |

    | | |---| | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    Page 107

    Three-phase variable transformer without solidly grounded neutral

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 108

    | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    ############## Table 13.8 EMC Filter Switch Location

    | | | |---|---|

    Model

    Switch Location Diagram IP20/UL Open Type or IP20/UL Type 1 Models: 2xxxxB/F and 4xxxxB/F

    IP55/UL Type 12 Models: 2xxxxV and 4xxxxV

    2011, 2017, 4005 - 4014 Figure 13.7 2024, 2031, 4021 - 4034 Figure 13.8 2046, 2059, 4040 - 4065 Figure 13.9 2075 - 2114, 4077 - 4124 Figure 13.10

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    2143, 2169, 4156 Figure 13.11 2211, 2273 4180, 4240 Figure 13.12 4302 Figure 13.13

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 109

    | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | |

    ############## A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF) Figure 13.7 EMC Filter Switch Location 1

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF) Figure 13.8

    |EMC|EMC|EMC| |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    Filter Switch Location 2

    Page 110

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF) Figure 13.9 EMC Filter Switch Location 3

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    | | | |---|---|

    A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF) Figure 13.10 EMC Filter Switch Location 4

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 111

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    13 European Standards

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF)

  • Figure 13.11 EMC Filter Switch Location 5
  • A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF)

  • Figure 13.12 EMC Filter Switch Location 6
  • A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF)

  • Figure 13.13 EMC Filter Switch Location 7
  • If you lose an EMC filter switch screw, use Table 13.9 to find the correct replacement screw and install the new screws with the correct tightening torque.

    NOTICE Only use the screws specified in this manual. If you use screws that are not approved, it can cause damage to the drive.

    ############## Table 13.9 Screw Sizes and Tightening Torques

    |Model|Screw Size|Tightening Torque N∙m| |---|---|---| |2011 - 2059, 4005 - 4065|M4 × 20|1.0 - 1.3| |2075 - 2114, 4077 - 4124|M4 × 30|1.0 - 1.3| |2143 - 2273, 4156 - 4302|M5 × 25|2.0 - 2.5|

    14 China RoHS Compliance

    #### 14 China RoHS Compliance

    Page 112

    15

    Figure 14.1 China RoHS Mark The China RoHS mark is displayed on products containing six specified hazardous substances that are in excess of regulatory limits, based on the “Administrative Measures for the Restriction of the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products” and “Marking for the Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electronic and Electrical Products” (SJ/T 11364-2014), which were promulgated on January 26, 2016. The number displayed in the center of the mark indicates the environment-friendly use period (number of years) in which electrical and electronic products that are being produced, sold, or imported to China can be used. The date of manufacture of the electrical and electronic product is the starting date of the environment-friendly use period for the product. The six specified hazardous substances contained in the product will not leak outside of the product during normal use within this period and will have no serious impact on the environment, the human body, or property. The environment-friendly use period for this product is 15 years. This period is not the product warranty period.

    ◆ Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product Table 14.1 shows the details on hazardous substances contained in this product.

    Table 14.1 Contents of Hazardous Substances in This Product

    |Parts Name|Hazardous Substances|Hazardous Substances|Hazardous Substances|Hazardous Substances|Hazardous Substances|Hazardous Substances| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Parts Name|Lead (Pb)|Mercury (Hg)|Cadmium (Cd)|Hexavalent Chromium

    (Cr(VI))|Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)|Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)| |Circuit Board|×|○|○|○|○|○| |Electronic Parts|×|○|○|○|○|○| |Brass Screw|×|○|○|○|○|○| |Aluminum Die Casting|×|○|○|○|○|○| |This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.

    ○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572. ×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.

    Note: This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.|

    15 对应中国RoHS指令

    15

    图 15.1 中国RoHS标志 中国RoHS标志依据2016年1月26日公布的《电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法》,以及《电子电气产品有害物 质限制使用标识要求》(SJ/T 11364-2014)作成。电子电气产品中特定6种有害物质的含量超过规定值时,应标识此标 志。中间的数字为在中国生产销售以及进口的电子电气产品的环保使用期限(年限)。电子电气产品的环保使用期限从 生产日期算起。在期限内,正常使用产品的过程中,不会有特定的6种有害物质外泄进而对环境、人和财产造成深刻影 响。 本产品的环保使用期限为15年。但需要注意的是环保使用期限并非产品的质量保证期限。

    ◆ 本产品中含有有害物质的信息

    本产品中所含有害物质的详细信息如表 15.1所示。

    表 15.1 本产品中有害物质的名称及含量

    |部件名称|有害物质|有害物质|有害物质|有害物质|有害物质|有害物质| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |部件名称|铅 (Pb)|汞 (Hg)|镉 (Cd)|六价铬 (Cr(VI))|多溴联苯 (PBB)|多溴二苯醚 (PBDE)| |实装基板|×|○|○|○|○|○| |电子元件|×|○|○|○|○|○| |黄铜螺钉|×|○|○|○|○|○| |铝压铸|×|○|○|○|○|○| |本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。

    ○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。 ×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。

    (注) 本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。|

    Page 113

    #### 16 Safe Disable Input

    This section gives precautions to support the Safe Disable input. Contact Yaskawa for more information. The safety function complies with the standards shown in Table 16.1.

    Table 16.1 Safety Standards and Applicable Harmonized Standards

    |Safety Standards|Applicable Harmonized Standards| |---|---| |Functional Safety|• IEC/EN 61508-1,2 (SIL3)
    • IEC/EN IEC 62061 (SIL3)
    • IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3)
    | |Machine Safety|ISO/EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (Cat.3, PL e)| |EMC|• IEC/EN 61000-6-7
    • IEC/EN 61326-3-1
    | |LVD|IEC/EN 61800-5-1|

    ◆ Safe Disable Specifications The Safe Disable input provides the stop function that complies with “Safe Torque Off” as specified by IEC/EN 61800-5-2. The Safe Disable input meets the requirements of EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC/EN 61508. It also has a safety status monitor to detect safety circuit errors. When you install the drive as a component in a system, you must make sure that the system complies with the applicable safety standards. Refer to Table 16.2 for safety function specifications.

    Table 16.2 Safe Disable Specifications

    |Item|Item|Description|Description| |---|---|---|---| |Input/Output|Input/Output|• Input: 2 Safe Disable input (H1, H2) Signal ON level: 18 Vdc to 28 Vdc Signal OFF level: -4 Vdc to +4 Vdc
    • Output: 1 MFDO safety monitor output for external device monitor (EDM)
    |• Input: 2 Safe Disable input (H1, H2) Signal ON level: 18 Vdc to 28 Vdc Signal OFF level: -4 Vdc to +4 Vdc
    • Output: 1 MFDO safety monitor output for external device monitor (EDM)
    | |Response time from when the input opens to when the drive output stops|Response time from when the input opens to when the drive output stops|3 ms or less|3 ms or less| |Response time from when the H1 and H2 terminal inputs open to when the EDM signal operates|Response time from when the H1 and H2 terminal inputs open to when the EDM signal operates|20 ms or less|20 ms or less| |Mission time *1|Mission time *1|10 years|20 years| |Failure probability|PFD|PFD = 9.29E-6|PFD = 1.85E-5| |Failure probability|PFH|PFH = 1.11E-9|PFH = 1.11E-9|

    |Item|Description| |---|---| |Performance level|e| |HFT (hardware fault tolerance)|N 1| |Type of subsystem|Type B| |MTTFD|High (2582 years)| |DCavg|Medium (90.59%)|

    *1 Parameter used for the statistical calculation required by functional safety standards and this is not linked to the warranty / guarantee

    period. Note: EDM External Device Monitoring PFD = Probability of Failure on Demand PFH = Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour

    Page 114

    ##### ◆ Notes

    DANGER Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use the Safe Disable function in the safety system of a machine, do a full risk assessment for the system to make sure that all parts of the system comply with applicable safety standards. Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.

    DANGER Sudden Movement Hazard. If the output circuit of the drive is damaged and the Safe Disable function turns OFF

    the drive output to a permanent magnet (PM) motor, the motor can rotate 180 electrical degrees. Prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel during this condition. Sudden motor movement can cause serious injury or death. It is possible for current to flow through the motor winding in these conditions.

    DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard. You cannot depend on the Safe Disable function to prevent electrical shock. Disconnect all power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before you remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous voltages before servicing or repair work. If you do work on the drive when it is energized and there is no cover over the electronic circuits, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Although the Safe Disable function is in operation, gravity or other external forces in the vertical axis can move the motor. Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not use the drive output signals to control external holding brakes or dynamic brakes for functional safety. Use a system that conforms to the functional safety requirements. Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death. Systems that use drive output signals (including EDM) for safety are not safe because drive output signals are not safety components.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Connect the Safe Disable inputs to the devices as specified by the safety requirements. If you connect the Safe Disable inputs incorrectly, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. To use the Safe Disable inputs, remove the jumpers between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC. If the Safe Disable circuit does not work correctly, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. When you clear the Safe Disable input, make sure that the Safe Disable Monitor output operates correctly as the specification for Safe Disable function. If the Safe Disable circuit does not operate correctly, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Regularly examine the Safe Disable input and all other safety features. A system that does not operate correctly can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Only let approved personnel who know about the drive, instruction manual, and safety standards wire, examine, and maintain the Safe Disable input. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.

    WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard. Only use the Safe Disable Monitor (multi-function output terminal set to the EDM function) to monitor the Safe Disable status or to find a malfunction in the Safe Disable inputs. The monitor output is not a safety output. If you use the Safe Disable Monitor incorrectly, it can cause death or serious injury.

    ############## Note:

  • •Drives that have a built-in safety function must be replaced 10 years after first use.
  • •Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m.
  • •A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 3 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 2 ms.
  • ##### ◆ Using the Safe Disable Function

    ■ Safe Disable Circuit The Safe Disable circuit has two isolated channels (terminals H1 and H2) that stop the output transistors. The input can use the internal power supply of the drive. Set the EDM function to one of the MFDO terminals [H2-xx = 21 or 121] to monitor the status of the Safe Disable function. This is the “Safe Disable monitor output function”.

    Figure 16.1 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example

    ##### ■ Enabling and Disabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”)

    Page 115

    Refer to Figure 16.2 for an example of drive operation when the drive changes from “Safe Torque Off” status to usual operation.

    Figure 16.2 Safe Disable Operation Switching from Usual Operation to “Safe Torque Off” Turn OFF (open) safety input terminal H1 or H2 to enable the Safe Disable function. When the Safe Disable function is enabled while the motor is operating, the drive output and motor torque turn off and the motor always coasts to stop. The b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection] setting does not have an effect on the stopping method.

    The “Safe Torque Off” status is only possible with the Safe Disable function. Clear the Run command to stop the drive. Turning off drive output (a baseblock condition) ≠ “Safe Torque Off”.

    Note:

  • •When it is necessary to ramp to stop the motor, do not turn off terminals H1 and H2 until the motor fully stops. This will prevent the motor from coasting to stop during usual operation.
  • •A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 2 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 2 ms.
  • Going from “Safe Torque Off” to Usual Operation The safety input will only release when there is no Run command.

  • • During Stop When the Safe Disable function is triggered during stop, close the circuit between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to disable “Safe Torque Off”. Enter the Run command after the drive stops correctly.
  • • During Run When the Safe Disable function is triggered during run, close the circuit between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to disable “Safe Torque Off” after clearing the Run command. Enter the Stop command, then enter the Run command when terminals H1 and H2 are ON or OFF.
  • ##### ■ Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Keypad Display

    Refer to Table 16.3 for information about the relation between the input channel status, Safety monitor output status, and drive output status.

    Table 16.3 Safe Disable Input and External Device Monitor (EDM) Terminal Status

    |Input Channel Status|Input 1 (H1-HC)|ON (Close the circuit)|OFF (Open)|ON (Close the circuit)|OFF (Open)| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Channel Status|Input 2 (H2-HC)|ON (Close the circuit)|ON (Close the circuit)|OFF (Open)|OFF (Open)| |MFDO Terminal (H2-xx = 21)|MFDO Terminal (H2-xx = 21)|OFF|OFF|OFF|ON| |MFDO Terminal (H2-xx = 21)|MFDO Terminal (H2-xx = 121)|ON|ON|ON|OFF| |Drive Output Status|Drive Output Status|Baseblock (Drive ready)|Safety status (STo)|Safety status (STo)|Safety status (STo)| |Keypad Display|Keypad Display|Normally displayed|SToF (Flashing)|SToF (Flashing)|STo (Flashing)| |LED Status Ring|LED Status Ring|Ready: Illuminated|ALM/ERR: Flashing|ALM/ERR: Flashing|Ready: Flashing| |MEMOBUS Register 0020 (Hex.)|MEMOBUS Register 0020 (Hex.)|bit C: 0 bit D: 0|bit C: 1 bit D: 0|bit C: 1 bit D: 0|bit C: 0 bit D: 1|

    Safety Function Status Monitor The drive Safety monitor output sends a feedback signal about the status of the Safety function. The Safety monitor output is one of the possible settings available for the MFDO terminals. If there is damage to the Safe Disable circuit, a controller (PLC or safety relay) must read this signal as an input signal to hold the “Safe Torque Off” status. This will help verify the condition of the safety circuit. Refer to the manual for the safety device for more information about the Safety function. You can use the MFDO function settings to switch the polarity of the Safety monitor output signal. Refer to Table 16.3 for setting instructions. Keypad Display If the two input channels are OFF (Open), the keypad will flash STo [Safe Torque OFF]. If there is damage to the Safe disable circuit or the drive, the keypad will flash SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware] when one input channel is OFF (Open) and the other is ON (Close the circuit). When you use the Safe disable circuit correctly, the keypad will not show SToF. If there is damage to the drive, the keypad will show SCF [Safety Circuit Fault] when the drive detects a fault in the Safe disable circuit. Refer to the chapter on Troubleshooting for more information.

    ##### ■ Validating the Safe Disable Function

    After you replace parts or do maintenance on the drive, first complete all necessary wiring to start the drive, then test the Safe Disable input with these steps. Keep a record of the test results.

    Page 116

  • 17 Seismic Standards
  • Note: Validate the Safe Disable function at least one time every three months to guarantee the specification values of the safety parameters.

  • 1. When the two input channels are OFF (Open), make sure that the keypad flashes STo [Safe Torque OFF], and make sure that the motor is not running.
  • 2. Monitor the ON/OFF status of the input channels and make sure that MFDO set to the EDM function operates as shown in Table 16.3. If one or more of these items are true, the ON/OFF status of the MFDO may not display correctly on the keypad:
  • • Incorrect parameter settings.
  • • A problem with an external device.
  • • The external wiring has a short circuit or is disconnected.
  • • There is damage to the device. Find the cause and repair the problem to correctly display the status.
  • 3. Make sure that the EDM signal operates during usual operation as shown in Table 16.3.
  • #### 17 Seismic Standards

    Note: Models 2143xV, 2169xV, and 4156xVare not in compliance with Seismic Standards.

    The Yaskawa drives in this manual are capable of structurally and operationally withstanding the seismic response criteria as defined in the International Building Code (IBC), ASCE7, and California Department of Health Care Access and Information (HCAI). The models in this manual were tested in compliance with AC-156 to meet the IBC seismic certification as shown on the certification labels. Refer to the Technical Reference (SIEPC71061732) for seismic installation instructions.

    Figure 17.1 Seismic Certification Label Example for Drives

    #### 18 Disposal Instructions

    Correctly discard the drive, packing material, battery, and microSD card as specified by regional, local, and municipal laws and regulations for this product.

    Note:

  • •Remove the battery and microSD card from the keypad before you discard the drive.
  • •You cannot recycle the battery. Discard used batteries as specified by the battery manufacturer.
  • •Customers are responsible for microSD card data protection. PC functions that format and delete the data may not be sufficient to fully erase the microSD card data. Yaskawa recommends that customers physically destroy the microSD card in a shredder or use data wipe software to fully erase the card.
  • 19 Maintenance

    ##### ◆ WEEE Directive

    The wheelie bin symbol on this product, its manual, or its packaging identifies that you must recycle it at the end of its product life. You must discard the product at an applicable collection point for electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Do not discard the product with usual waste.

    Page 117

    #### 19 Maintenance

    Refer to the Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual (TOEPYAIHV6001) for more information. Only let authorized persons do maintenance, examine, or replace components on the drive. Read this manual carefully and know all the precautions and safety information before installing, wiring, repairing, or examining the drive or replacing components. Examine and maintain the drive and peripheral devices regularly to extend the life of the drive and decrease performance deterioration, decrease early wear, and decrease drive failures. Regular examinations and maintenance will also decrease system downtime. Refer to the Technical Reference (SIEPC71061732) for more information about maintenance and examinations. Examine the drive one time each year at a minimum. The operating conditions, environmental conditions, and use conditions will have an effect on the examination frequency for connected equipment. Examine the drive more frequently if you use the drive in bad conditions or in these conditions:

  • • High ambient temperatures
  • • Frequent starting and stopping
  • • Changes in the AC power supply or load
  • • Too much vibration or shock loading
  • • Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, or chlorine atmospheres
  • • Unsatisfactory storage conditions.
  • The drive has Maintenance Monitors that monitor component wear and give warnings when the performance life estimate is approaching. When you use the maintenance monitors, you remove the need to shut down all system components when you have problems. Refer to these monitors:

  • • U4-04 [Cool Fan Maintenance]
  • • U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance]
  • • U4-07 [IGBT Maintenance]
  • You can set alarm notifications to inform you about the maintenance periods for specific drive components. Refer to these Maintenance setting parameters:

  • • o4-04 [Fan Maintenance Time]
  • • o4-05 [Capacitor Maintenance Setting]
  • • o4-07 [Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set]
  • • o4-09 [IGBT Maintenance Setting]
  • • o4-10 [IGBT Maintenance Time]
  • #### 20 Troubleshooting

    Refer to the Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual (TOEPYAIHV6001) for more information. If the drive or motor do not operate correctly, look at the drive keypad for fault and alarm information.

  • • For drive faults:
  • – The keypad shows the fault code.
  • – When o2-24 = 0 or 1 [LED Light Function Selection = Enable Status Ring & Keypad LED or LED Status Ring Disable], and ALM/ERR on the LED Status Ring illuminate continuously.
  • – The drive shuts off output and the fault relay output activates. The motor coasts to stop.
  • • For drive alarms:
  • Page 118

  • – The keypad shows the alarm code.
  • – When o2-24 = 0 or 1, and ALM/ERR on the LED Status Ring flash.
  • – Usually, the drive will continue to operate the motor. Some alarms let you select a motor stopping method.
  • ##### ◆ Fault Reset

  • 1. Remove the cause of the fault or alarm.
  • 2. While the keypad is showing the fault or alarm code, push (RESET) or on the keypad.
  • ##### ◆ Fault

    This section gives information about some of the causes and possible solutions of faults. You must use the Fault Reset operation to remove the fault before you can operate the drive. Use the information in this table to remove the cause of the fault.

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |AUXFB|PI Aux Feedback Level Loss|The analog input from the terminal set for PI Auxiliary Control Feedback Level [H3-xx = 27] is more than 21 mA or less than 3 mA for longer than 1 s.|Repair transducer or wiring.| |bAT|Keypad Battery Low Voltage|The keypad battery voltage is low.|Replace the keypad battery.| |bCE|Bluetooth Communication Fault|The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile or DriveWizard installed is too far from the keypad.|Use the smartphone or tablet 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the keypad. Note: bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the smartphone or tablet.| |bCE|Bluetooth Communication Fault|Radio waves from a different device are causing interference with communications between the smartphone or tablet and keypad.|Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio interference.| |bUS|Option Communication Error|The drive did not receive a signal from the controller.|Correct wiring errors.| |CE|Modbus Communication Error|The communications cable wiring is incorrect.|Correct wiring errors.| |CoF|Current Offset Fault|The drive starts operation while the induced voltage stays in the motor (during coasting to a stop or after fast deceleration).|• Make a sequence that does not restart operation when induced voltage stays in the motor.
    • Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
    • Use Speed Search from Fmax or Fref [H1-xx = 61, 62] to do a speed search through one of the external terminals.


    Note:

    When controlling the PM motor, External Speed Search commands 1 and 2 operate the same.| |CPF00 to CPF03, CPF07 to CPF08, CPF11 to CPF14, CPF16 to CPF24, and CPF26 to CPF39|Control Circuit Error|A drive hardware problem occurred.|• Re-energize the drive.
    • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |CPF06|Control Circuit Error (EEPROM memory Data Error)|The drive power supply was de-energized while a communication option entered a parameter Write command.|Set A1-03 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters 2-Wire Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] and initialize the drive.| |dEv|Speed Deviation|The load is too heavy.|Decrease the load.| |DIFF|Differential Feedback Exceeded|The difference between the PID Feedback and Differential Level Source [H3-xx 2D] is more than the level set in Y4-18 [Differential Level] for the time set in Y4-19 [Differential Lvl Detection Time].|• Replace the feedback transducer or transducers.
    • Make sure that the settings of Y4-18 [Differential Level] to Y4-20 [Differential Level Detection Sel] are correct.
    | |dv7|Polarity Judge Timeout|There is a disconnection in the motor coil winding.|Measure the motor line-to-line resistance and replace the motor if a coil is disconnected.| |dWF1|EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error|There is an error in the EEPROM peripheral circuit.|• Re-energize the drive.
    • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    | |dWF2|DriveWorksEZ Fault 2|There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the fault. This is not a drive fault.| |dWF3|DriveWorksEZ Fault 3|There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the fault. This is not a drive fault.| |dWFL|DriveWorksEZ Fault|There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the fault. This is not a drive fault.| |EF0|Option Card External Fault|The communication option received an external fault from the controller.|1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause.
    2. Clear the external fault input from the controller.
    | |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|MFDI terminal Sx caused an external fault through an external device.|1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause.
    2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.
    | |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|The wiring is incorrect.|Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal Sx.| |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|External Fault [H1-01 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI terminal Sx, but the terminal is not in use.|Correctly set the MFDI.|

    Page 119

    |Err|EEPROM Write Error|There was a problem with the EEPROM hardware.|• Re-energize the drive.
    • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to replace the board.
    | |FAn1|Drive Cooling Fan Fault|The cooling fan stopped operating correctly.|• Examine cooling fan operation.
    • Re-energize the drive.
    • Examine U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] and U4-04 [Cool Fan Maintenance]. If the performance life of the cooling fan is expired or if there is damage to the fan, replace the fan.
    | |FDBKL|WIRE Break|The analog input from the terminal set for PID Feedback [H3-xx B] is more than 21mA or less than 3mA for longer than 1 s in these conditions:

    • b5-82 2 [Feedback Loss 4~20mA Detect Sel Fault]
    • b5-01 ≠ 0 [PID Mode Setting ≠ Disabled]
    • H3-01 or H3-09 2 [Terminal A1/A2 Signal Level Selection 4 to 20 mA]
    |Make sure that you install the PID feedback source and it operates correctly.| |GF|Ground Fault|Overheating caused damage to the motor or the motor insulation is not satisfactory.|Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.| |GF|Ground Fault|The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground to make a short circuit.|• Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair short circuits.
    • Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction, replace the cable.
    | |GF|Ground Fault|An increase in the stray capacitance of the cable and the ground terminal caused an increase in the leakage current.|• If the wiring length of the cable is more than 100 m, decrease the carrier frequency.
    • Decrease the stray capacitance.
    | |GF|Ground Fault|There was a problem with the drive hardware.|Replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |HFB|High Feedback Sensed|The feedback level is more than the level set in Y1-11 [High Feedback Level] for the time set in Y1-12 [High Feedback Lvl Fault Dly Time].|• Decrease the feedback level less than Y1-11.
    • Set Y1-11 and Y1-12 correctly.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |HIAUX|High PI Aux Feedback Level|PI Auxiliary Feedback is more than the level set in YF-12 [PI Aux Control High Level Detect] for the time set in YF-13 [PI Aux High Level Detection Time] in these conditions:

    • The drive operates in AUTO Mode.
    • The output frequency > 0.
    |• Decrease the PI Auxiliary Feedback level less than YF-12.
    • Set YF-12 and YF-13 correctly.
    | |HLCE|High Level Communication Errors|Communication data error occurred between the option and the master drive when you use Gateway function.

    The master drive detects oFxxx and the slave drive detects HLCE.|Examine the wiring between the option and the master drive and remove the cause of the fault.| |LF|Output Phase Loss|The motor main circuit cable is disconnected.|Connect motor main circuit cable wiring. Correct wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.| |LF2|Output Current Imbalance|Phase loss occurred in the wiring on the output side of the drive.|Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires on the output side of the drive, and repair problems.| |LFB|Low Feedback Sensed|The feedback level is less than the level set in Y1-08 [Low Feedback Level] for the time set in Y1-09 [Low Feedback Lvl Fault Dly Time].|• Increase the feedback level to more than Y1-08.
    • Set Y1-08 and Y1-09 correctly.
    | |LOAUX|Low PI Aux Feedback Level|When the drive operates in AUTO Mode or HAND Mode, PI Auxiliary Feedback is less than the level set in YF-09 [PI Aux Control Low Lvl Detection] for the time set in YF-10 [PI Aux Control Low Lvl Det Time] and the drive is running.|• Increase the PI Auxiliary Feedback level to be more than YF-09.
    • Set YF-09 and YF-10 correctly.
    | |LOP|Loss of Prime|The drive used the Y1-18 [Prime Loss Detection Method] setting and measured a pump load that is less than the level set in Y1-19 [Prime Loss Level] for the time set in Y1-20 [Prime Loss Time], and the output frequency is Y1-21 [Prime Loss Activation Freq] or more.|• Examine for a dry well, air in the system, or no water in the system. Use preferred priming method suggested by the pump manufacturer to restart the pump.
    • When there is resistance in the pump, let the system pump water again.
    • Set Y1-18 to Y1-21 correctly.
    | |MSL|Net Master Lost|When Y9-27 3 [Network Recovery Fault MSL] and the drive does not receive message from the master within the time set in Y9-26 [Master Timeout].|• Increase Y9-26 to account for network latency.
    • Make sure that there is a drive on the network with parameters set to Y1-01 3 [Multiplex Mode Memobus Network] and Y927 0 [Automatic].
    • Examine network connections and the settings of H5-01 [Drive Node Address] and Y9-25 [Highest Node Address] for all drives on the network.
    | |NMS|Setpoint Not Met|The feedback deviates from the setpoint at a level more than Y1-15 [Maximum Setpoint Difference] for the time set in Y1-16 [Not Maintaining Setpoint Time].|• Examine for a blocked impeller, over cycling, or broken pipe.
    • Set Y1-15 and Y1-16 correctly.
    | |nSE|Node Setup Error|The drive received a Run command while the Node Setup function was active.|Stop the drive when the Node Setup function is in use.| |oC|Overcurrent|The load is too large.|• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
    • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model if the current value is more than the drive rated current.
    • Decrease the load or replace with a larger drive to prevent sudden changes in the current level.
    | |oC|Overcurrent|Overheating caused damage to the motor or the motor insulation is not satisfactory.|Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.| |oC|Overcurrent|The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground to make a short circuit.|• Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair short circuits.
    • Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction, replace the cable.
    | |oC|Overcurrent|A short circuit or ground fault on the drive output side caused damage to the output transistor of the drive.|• Make sure that there is not a short circuit in terminals - and terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
    • If there is a short circuit, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    | |oC|Overcurrent|The acceleration time is too short.|• Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to the load inertia and the specified acceleration time.
    • Increase the values set in C1-01 or C1-03 [Acceleration Times] to get the necessary torque.
    • Increase the values set in C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve Characteristics] to get the necessary torque.
    • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
    | |oC|Overcurrent|The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable motor output of the drive.|• Examine the motor nameplate, the motor, and the drive to make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor rated current.
    • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
    | |oC|Overcurrent|A magnetic contactor was switched at the output.|Set the operation sequence to not turn ON or OFF the magnetic contactor while the drive is outputting voltage.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| | | |The V/f pattern settings are incorrect.|• Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the frequency.
    • Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-10.
    | | | |The torque compensation gain is too large.|Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to make sure that the motor does not stall.| | | |Electrical interference caused a problem.|Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.| | | |The gain during overexcitation operation is too large.|• Find the time when the fault occurs.
    • If the fault occurs at the same time as overexcitation operation, decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain] and consider the motor flux saturation.
    | | | |The drive received a Run command while the motor was coasting.|• Examine the sequence and input the Run command after the motor fully stops.
    • Set b3-01 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection Enabled] or set H1-xx 61, 62 [Speed Search from Fmax or Fref] to input speed search commands from the MFDI terminals.
    | | | |The motor code setting is incorrect for PM Control Methods.|• Enter the correct motor code to E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] as specified by the PM motor.
    • For specialized motors, refer to the motor test report and set E5xx [PM Motor Settings] correctly.
    | | | |The current flowing in the motor is more than the value set in L8-27 [Overcurrent Detection Gain] for PM Control Methods.|Correct the value set in L8-27.| | | |The control method is set incorrectly for the motor.|Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] correctly.|

    Page 120

    | | |The motor main circuit cable is too long.|Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.| | | |Speed search does not complete at start when A1-02

    = 8 [EZ Vector Control] and you use an induction motor.|When E9-01 0 [Motor Type Selection Induction (IM)], set b324 2 [Speed Search Method Selection Current Detection Speed Search].| | | |The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass relay is damaged.|• Re-energize the drive.
    • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
    | | | |An overcurrent condition occurred during overexcitation deceleration.|• Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain].
    • Decrease the value set in n3-21 [HSB Current Suppression Level].
    | | | |You are using a premium efficiency motor.|Set these parameters:

    • b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] default value × 2
    • L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time] default value × 2
    • L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time] default value × 2
    | |OD|Output Disconnect|The output circuit between the drive and the motor is open, and the drive output current is less than 5% of E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].|Close the disconnected output circuit between the drive and the motor.| |oFA00|Option Not Compatible with Port|The option connected to connector CN5-A is not compatible.|Connect the option to the correct connector.| |oFA00|Option Not Compatible with Port|• The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 MultiProtocol Ethernet Card are at factory default settings.
    • The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 are not set to a valid protocol.
    • The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 are set to a valid protocol that is not supported by the drive.
    |Remove power from the drive, wait for the charge light to go out, then set the DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 to the desired protocol.

    Note:

    If you connect a JOHB-SMP3 to drives with software versions PRG: 01017 and earlier, the drives detect oFA00 [Option Not Compatible with Port].

    The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version. You can also use U1-25 [SoftwareNumber FLASH] to identify the software version.| |oFA00|Option Not Compatible with Port|The option failed. Check the LED flash pattern on the option as specified by the option manual.|Replace the option.| |oFA01|Option Fault/Connection Error|The option card connected to connector CN5 is not compatible.|1. De-energize the drive.
    2. Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the option card to the connector on the drive.
    | |oFA05 and
    oFA06
    |Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5|A fault occurred in the option card.|1. De-energize the drive.
    2. Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector.
    3. If the problem continues, replace the option card.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |oFA10, oFA11|Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5|A fault occurred in the option card.|1. De-energize the drive.
    2. Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector.
    3. If the problem continues, replace the option card.
    | |oFA12 to oFA17|Option Card Connection Error (CN5)|A fault occurred in the option card.|1. De-energize the drive.
    2. Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector.
    3. If the problem continues, replace the option card.
    | |oFA30 to oFA43|Communication Option Card Connection Error (CN5)|A fault occurred in the option card.|1. De-energize the drive.
    2. Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector.
    3. If the problem continues, replace the option card.
    | |oH|Heatsink Overheat|The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the value set in L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].|• Measure the ambient temperature.
    • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
    • Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to lower the ambient temperature.
    • Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much heat.
    | |oH1|Heatsink Overheat|The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the oH1 detection level.|• Measure the ambient temperature.
    • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
    • Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to lower the ambient temperature.
    • Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much heat.
    | |oH3|Motor Overheat (PTC Input)|The thermistor wiring that detects motor temperature is defective.|Correct wiring errors.| |oH4|Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)|The motor has overheated.|• Check the load level, acceleration/deceleration time, and motor start/stop frequency (cycle time).
    • Decrease the load.
    • Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-04 [Acceleration/ Deceleration Times].
    • Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] correctly to the value specified by the motor nameplate.
    • Make sure that the motor cooling system is operating correctly, and repair or replace it if it is damaged.
    • Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-10. Decrease the values set in E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] and E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage].


    Note:

    If E1-08 and E1-10 are set too low, the overload tolerance will decrease at low speeds.| |oL1|Motor Overload|The load is too heavy.|Decrease the load. Note: Reset oL1 when U4-16 [Motor oL1 Level] < 100.| |oL1|Motor Overload|The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times are too short.|• Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor start/ stop frequencies (cycle times).
    • Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-04 [Acceleration/ Deceleration Times].
    | |oL1|Motor Overload|Overload occurred while running at low speed.|• Decrease the load when running at low speed.
    • Increase the motor speed.
    • If the motor is run frequently at low speeds, replace the motor with a larger motor or use a drive-dedicated motor.


    Note:

    For general-purpose motors, overload can occur while running at low speed when operating at below the rated current.| |oL1|Motor Overload|L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] is set incorrectly.|Set L1-01 in as specified by the motor qualities for a drive-dedicated motor.| |oL1|Motor Overload|The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities.|• Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the frequency.
    • Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-10. Decrease the values set in E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] and E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage].


    Note:

    If the values set in E1-08 and E1-10 are too low, the overload tolerance will decrease at low speeds.| |oL1|Motor Overload|E1-06 [Base Frequency] is set incorrectly.|Set E1-06 to the rated frequency shown on the motor nameplate.| |oL1|Motor Overload|One drive is operating more than one motor.|Set L1-01 0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection Disabled], connect thermal overload relay to each motor to prevent damage to the motor.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| | | |The electronic thermal protector qualities and the motor overload properties do not align.|• Examine the motor qualities and set L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] correctly.
    • Connect a thermal overload relay to the motor.
    | | | |The electronic thermal protector is operating at an incorrect level.|Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] correctly to the value specified by the motor nameplate.| | | |There is increased motor loss from overexcitation operation.|• Lower the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain].
    • Set L3-04 ≠ 4 [Stall Prevention during Decel ≠ Overexcitation/ High Flux].
    • Set n3-23 0 [Overexcitation Braking Operation Disabled].
    | | | |The speed search-related parameters are set incorrectly.|• Examine the settings for all speed search related parameters.
    • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time].
    • Set b3-24 1 [Speed Search Method Selection Speed Estimation] after Auto-Tuning.
    | | | |Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the output current to change.|Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.| | | |Overload occurred during overexcitation deceleration.|• Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain].
    • Decrease the value set in n3-21 [HSB Current Suppression Level].
    | |oL2|Drive Overload|The load is too large.|Decrease the load.| |oL2|Drive Overload|The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times are too short.|• Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor start/ stop frequencies (cycle times).
    • Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-04 [Acceleration/ Deceleration Times].
    |

    Page 121

    |oL2|Drive Overload|The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities.|• Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the frequency.
    • Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. Decrease the values set in E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] and E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-10.


    Note:

    If the values set in E1-08 and E1-10 are too low, the overload tolerance will decrease at low speeds.| |oL2|Drive Overload|The drive capacity is too small.|Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.| |oL2|Drive Overload|Overload occurred while running at low speed.|• Decrease the load when running at low speed.
    • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
    • Decrease the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection].
    | |oL2|Drive Overload|The torque compensation gain is too large.|Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to make sure that the motor does not stall.| |oL2|Drive Overload|The speed search-related parameters are set incorrectly.|• Examine the settings for all speed search-related parameters.
    • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time].
    • Set b3-24 1 [Speed Search Method Selection Speed Estimation] after Auto-Tuning.
    | |oL2|Drive Overload|Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the output current to change.|• Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.
    • Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.
    | |oL2|Drive Overload|Overload occurred during overexcitation deceleration.|• Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain].
    • Decrease the value set in n3-21 [HSB Current Suppression Level].
    | |oL3|Overtorque Detection 1|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: The machine is locked.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |oL4|Overtorque Detection 2|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: The machine is locked.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |oL7|High Slip Braking Overload|The load inertia is too large.|Decrease deceleration times in C1-02 and C1-04 [Deceleration Times] for applications that do not use High Slip Braking.| |oL7|High Slip Braking Overload|An external force on the load side rotated the motor.|Decrease deceleration times in C1-02 and C1-04 [Deceleration Times] for applications that do not use High Slip Braking.| |oL7|High Slip Braking Overload|Something is preventing deceleration on the load side.|Decrease deceleration times in C1-02 and C1-04 [Deceleration Times] for applications that do not use High Slip Braking.| |oL7|High Slip Braking Overload|The value set in n3-04 [HSB Overload Time] is too small.|• Increase the value set in n3-04.
    • Connect a thermal overload relay to the motor, and set n3-04 1200 s (maximum value).
    | |oPr|Keypad Connection Fault|The keypad is not securely connected to the connector on the drive.|Examine the connection between the keypad and the drive.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| | | |The connection cable between the drive and the keypad is disconnected.|• Remove the keypad and connect it again.
    • If the cable is damaged, replace it.
    | |oS|Overspeed|There is overshoot.|Decrease C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and increase C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1].| |ov|Overvoltage|Deceleration time is too short and regenerative energy is flowing from the motor into the drive.|• Set L3-04 1 [Stall Prevention during Decel General Purpose].
    • Increase the values set in C1-02 or C1-04 [Deceleration Times].
    • Perform Deceleration Rate Auto-Tuning.
    | |ov|Overvoltage|The acceleration time is too short.|• Make sure that sudden drive acceleration does not cause the fault.
    • Increase the values set in C1-01 or C1-03 [Acceleration Times].
    • Increase the value set in C2-02 [S-Curve Time @ End of Accel].
    • Set L3-11 1 [Overvoltage Suppression Select Enabled].
    | |ov|Overvoltage|The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground (the current short to ground is charging the main circuit capacitor of the drive through the power supply).|1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
    2. Re-energize the drive.
    | |ov|Overvoltage|If the drive detects ov in these conditions, the speed search-related parameters are incorrect:

    • During speed search
    • During momentary power loss recovery
    • When the drive starts again automatically
    • When you set A1-02 0 [Control Method Selection V/f Control] and do rotational AutoTuning
    • You are using a premium efficiency motor
    |• Examine the settings for all speed search related parameters.
    • Set b3-19 ≠ 0 [Speed Search Restart Attempts ≠ 0 times].
    • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] setting.
    • Do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance and then set b3-24 1 [Speed Search Method Selection Speed Estimation].
    • Increase the value set in L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time].
    • Set these parameters:
    • b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] default value × 2
    • L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time] default value × 2
    • L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time] default value × 2
    | |ov|Overvoltage|The power supply voltage is too high.|Decrease the power supply voltage to align with the drive rated voltage.| |ov|Overvoltage|Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction.|• Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.
    • Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if necessary.
    | |ov|Overvoltage|The load inertia is set incorrectly.|• Examine the load inertia settings with KEB, overvoltage suppression, or stall prevention during deceleration.
    • Adjust L3-25 [Load Inertia Ratio] to align with the qualities of the machine.
    | |ov|Overvoltage|There is motor hunting.|• Adjust n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain Setting] settings.
    • Adjust n8-45 [Speed Feedback Detection Gain] and n8-47 [Pullin Current Comp Filter Time] settings.
    | |ov|Overvoltage|Speed search does not complete at start when you use an induction motor in EZOLV control.|When E9-01 0 [Motor Type Selection Induction (IM)], set b324 2 [Speed Search Method Selection Current Detection 2].| |ov2|DC Bus Overvoltage 2|The wiring is too long and DC bus voltage is too large.|• Shorten the shielded motor cable.
    • Decrease the carrier frequency.
    • If the power supply has a neutral ground, switch on the internal EMC filter.
    | |PE1, PE2|PLC Faults|The communication option detected a fault.|Refer to the manual for the communication option card.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|There is a phase loss in the drive input power.|Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|There is loose wiring in the drive input power terminals.|Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|The drive input power voltage is changing too much.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    • If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic contactor on the main circuit side for problems.
    | |PF|Input Phase Loss|There is unsatisfactory balance between voltage phases.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    • Set L8-05 0 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel Disabled].
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| | | |The main circuit capacitors have become unserviceable.|• Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    • If drive input power is correct and the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    | |PSE|JOHB-SMP3 Protocol Set Error|• The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 MultiProtocol Ethernet Card are at factory default settings.
    • The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 are not set to a valid protocol.
    |Remove power from the drive, wait for the charge light to go out, then set the DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 to the desired protocol.

    Note:

    • Refer to the instructions packaged with the JOHB-SMP3 for more information about DIP switch settings.
    • “PSE” error occurs only for PRG: 01018 and later, and only when DIP switches are at their factory default setting. The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version. You can also use U1-25 [SoftwareNumber FLASH] to identify the software version.
    |

    Page 122

    |SC|Short Circuit/IGBT Failure|Overheating caused damage to the motor or the motor insulation is not satisfactory.|Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.| |SCF|Safety Circuit Fault|The safety circuit is broken.|Replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |SEr|Speed Search Retries Exceeded|The speed search-related parameters are set incorrectly.|• Decrease b3-10 [Speed Estimation Detection Gain].
    • Increase b3-17 [Speed Est Retry Current Level].
    • Increase b3-18 [Speed Est Retry Detection Time].
    • Do Auto-Tuning again.
    | |STPo|Motor Step-Out Detected|The motor code is set incorrectly for PM Control Methods.|• Set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] correctly as specified by the motor.
    • For specialized motors, refer to the motor test report and set E5xx correctly.
    | |TiM|Keypad Time Not Set|There is a battery in the keypad, but the date and time are not set.|Use the keypad to set the date and time.| |UL3|Undertorque Detection 1|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: There is a broken pulley belt.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |UL4|Undertorque Detection 2|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: There is a broken pulley belt.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |UL6|Underload or Belt Break Detected|The output current decreased less than the motor underload curve set in L6-14 [Motor Underload Level @ Min Freq] for longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].|Adjust the L6-14 setting to set the output current to stay the level more than the motor underload curve during usual operations.| |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|There is a phase loss in the drive input power.|Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.| |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|There is loose wiring in the drive input power terminals.|Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.| |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|The drive input power voltage is changing too much.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    • If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic contactor on the main circuit side for problems.
    | |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|There was a loss of power.|Use a better power supply.| |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|The main circuit capacitors have become unserviceable.|Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |Uv1|DC Bus Undervoltage|The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass relay is damaged.|U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the performance life of the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is more than 90%, replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing the board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |Uv2|Control Power Undervoltage|The value set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time] increased and the momentary power loss recovery unit is not connected to the drive.|Connect the momentary power loss recovery unit to the drive.| |Uv3|Soft Charge Answerback Fault|The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass relay is damaged.|• Re-energize the drive.
    • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
    • Check monitor U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte], which shows the performance life of the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is more than 90%, replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing the board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| | | |Air inside the drive is too hot.|Check the ambient temperature of the drive.| |VLTS|Thermostat Fault|The digital input from the terminal set for Thermostat Fault [H1-xx = 88] is active.|Examine the wiring or wait for the motor to cool.|

    ##### ◆ Minor Faults/Alarms

    This section gives information about the causes and possible solutions when a minor fault or alarm occurs. Use the information in this table to remove the cause of the minor fault or alarm.

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |AFBL|Analog Fbk Lost, Switched to Net|The analog input source is defective or broken.|• Make sure that you install the PID Feedback source and it operates correctly.
    • If the drive does not have an analog PID Feedback source, set Y9-02 = 3 [System Feedback Source = Network Only] to set the drive to read the network PID Feedback from another drive.
    | |AFBL|Analog Fbk Lost, Switched to Net|The parameter setting is H3-xx ≠ B [MFAI Function Selection ≠ PID Feedback].|• Set H3-xx = B to use the analog input source for PID Feedback.
    • If the drive does not have an analog PID Feedback source, set Y9-02 = 3.
    | |AuDis|Low PI Aux Fdbk Drive Disabled|• Parameter setting of Y9-51 = 1 [PI Aux Control Turn-Off Method = Enabled] does not let the drive operate in Memobus Multiplex.
    • PI Auxiliary Feedback is less than the YF-06 [PI Aux Control Wake-up Level] setting, and the drive is stopped or running as a Lag drive.
    |• Make sure that the YF-06 setting is correct.
    • Wait for the PI Auxiliary Feedback to recover.
    | |AUXFB|PI Aux Feedback Level Loss|The analog input from the terminal set to H3-xx = 27 [MFAI Function Selection = PI Auxiliary Control Feedback Level] is more than 21 mA or less than 3 mA for longer than 1 s.|Repair transducer or wiring.| |AuFbl|PI Aux Fdbk Lost Switched to Net|The analog input source is defective or broken.|• Make sure that you install the Auxiliary PI Feedback source and it operates correctly.
    • Make sure that the YF-19 [PI Aux Ctrl Feedback WireBreak] setting is correct.
    • If there is no analog feedback, set Y9-50 = 3 [PI Auxiliary Control Source = Network Only] to set the drive to read the network Auxiliary PI Feedback from another drive.
    | |bAT|Keypad Battery Low Voltage|The keypad battery voltage is low.|Replace the keypad battery.| |bb|Baseblock|An external baseblock command was entered through one of the MFDI terminals Sx, and the drive output stopped as shown by an external baseblock command.|Examine the external sequence and timing of the baseblock command input.| |bCE|Bluetooth Communication Error|The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile or DriveWizard is too far from the keypad.|Move to 10 m (32.8 ft) or less from the keypad. Note: bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the keypad for different smartphone and tablet specifications.| |bCE|Bluetooth Communication Error|Radio waves from a different device are causing interference with communications between the smartphone or tablet and keypad.|Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio interference.| |BuDif|Main Fdbk Lost, Using Diff Fdbk|Parameter Y4-41 = 1 [Diff Lvl Src Fdbk Backup Select = Enabled] and the drive detected a wire-break on the analog input terminal set for PID Feedback [H3-xx = B].|Examine the connection of the Main PID Feedback Transducer.| |BuDif|Main Fdbk Lost, Using Diff Fdbk|Main PID Feedback Transducer is broken.|Replace Main PID Feedback Transducer.|

    Page 123

    |Bu-Fb|Main Fdbk Lost Using Backup Fdbk|The drive detected wire-break on the analog input terminal set to H3-xx = B [MFAI Function Selection

    = PID Feedback].|Examine the connection of the Main PID Feedback Transducer.| |Bu-Fb|Main Fdbk Lost Using Backup Fdbk|Main PID Feedback Transducer is broken.|Replace Main PID Feedback Transducer.| |BuFbl|Backup Fdbk Lost Chk/Repl Xducer|The drive detected wire-break on the analog input terminal set for PID Feedback Backup [H3-xx = 24].|Examine the connection of the Differential PID Feedback transducer.| |BuFbl|Backup Fdbk Lost Chk/Repl Xducer|Backup PID Feedback Transducer is broken.|Replace Backup PID Feedback Transducer.| |BuFbl|Backup Fdbk Lost Chk/Repl Xducer|Parameter Y4-41 = 1 [Diff Lvl Src Fdbk Backup Select = Enabled] and the drive detected a wire-break on the analog input terminal set for Differential Level Source [H3-xx = 2D].|Examine the connection of the Differential PID Feedback transducer.| |BuFbl|Backup Fdbk Lost Chk/Repl Xducer|Parameter Y4-41 = 1 and the Differential PID Feedback Transducer is broken.|• Replace the Differential PID Feedback Transducer.
    • Set Y4-41 = 0 [Disabled].
    | |bUS|Option Communication Error|The communications cable wiring is incorrect.|Correct wiring errors.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |bUSy|Busy|You set the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to change parameters, but you used the keypad to change parameters.|Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the enter command, then use the keypad to change the parameter.| |bUSy|Busy|You tried to change a parameter while the drive was changing setting.|Wait until the process is complete.| |CALL|Serial Comm Transmission Error|The communications cable wiring is incorrect.|Correct wiring errors.| |CE|Modbus Communication Error|The communications cable wiring is incorrect.|Correct wiring errors.| |CE|Modbus Communication Error|There is a short circuit in the communications cable or the communications cable is not connected.|• Repair short circuits and connect cables.
    • Replace the defective communications cable.
    | |CE|Modbus Communication Error|Electrical interference caused a communication data error.|• Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.
    • Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if necessary.
    • Use only the recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or the drive input power side.
    • Separate the communication wiring from drive power lines, and install a noise filter to the input side of the power supply for communication.
    • Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the controller.
    | |CE|Modbus Communication Error|The communication protocol is not compatible.|• Examine the values set in H5-xx.
    • Examine the settings on the controller side and correct the difference in communication conditions.
    | |CE|Modbus Communication Error|The value set in H5-09 [CE Detection Time] is too small for the communications cycle.|• Change the controller software settings.
    • Increase the value set in H5-09.
    | |CE|Modbus Communication Error|The controller software or hardware is causing a communication problem.|Examine the controller and remove the cause of the problem.| |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|The communications cable wiring is incorrect.|Correct wiring errors.| |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|There is a short circuit in the communications cable or the communications cable is not connected.|• Repair short circuits and connect cables.
    • Replace the defective communications cable.
    | |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|Electrical interference caused a communication data error.|• Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.
    • Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if necessary.
    • Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
    • Separate the communication wiring from drive power lines, and install a noise filter to the input side of the power supply for communication.
    • Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the controller.
    | |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|The communication protocol is not compatible.|• Examine the values set in H5-xx.
    • Examine the settings on the controller side and correct the difference in communication conditions.
    | |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|The value set in H5-09 [CE Detection Time] is too small for the communications cycle.|• Make sure that the settings are compatible.
    • Change the software settings in the PLC.
    • Increase the value set in H5-09.
    | |CE|Run at H5-34 (CE Go-To-Freq)|The controller software or hardware is causing a communication problem.|Examine the controller and remove the cause of the problem.| |CrST|Cannot Reset|The drive received a fault reset command when a Run command was active.|Turn off the Run command then de-energize and re-energize the drive.| |CyPo|Cycle Power to Accept Changes|Although F6-15 1 [Comm. Option Parameters Reload = Reload Now], the drive does not update the communication option parameters.|Re-energize the drive to update the communication option parameters.| |dEv|Speed Deviation|The load is too heavy|Decrease the load.| |DIFF|Differential Feedback Exceeded|The difference between the PID Feedback and Differential Level Source [H3-xx 2D] is more than the level set in Y4-18 [Pre-Charge Loss of Prime Level 2] for the time set in Y4-19 [Differential Lvl Detection Time].|• Replace the feedback transducer or transducers.
    • Set Y4-18 and Y4-19 correctly.
    | |dnE|Drive Disabled|A terminal set for H1-xx 6A [MFDI Function Selection Drive Enable] deactivated.|Examine the operation sequence.| |dWA2|DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2|The DriveWorksEZ program output a minor fault.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the fault. This is not a drive fault.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |dWA3|DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3|The DriveWorksEZ program output a minor fault.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the fault. This is not a drive fault.| |dWAL|DriveWorksEZ Alarm|There was an error in the DriveWorksEZ program.|Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the error. This is not a drive fault.| |EF|FWD/REV Run Command Input Error|The drive received a forward command and a reverse command at the same time for longer than 0.5 s.|Examine the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the problem.| |EF0|Option Card External Fault|The communication option card received an external fault from the controller.|1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause.
    2. Clear the external fault input from the controller.
    | |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|MFDI terminal Sx caused an external fault through an external device.|1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause.
    2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.
    |

    Page 124

    |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|The wiring is incorrect.|Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal Sx.| |EF1 to EF7|External Fault (Terminal Sx)|External Fault [H1-01 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI terminal Sx, but the terminal is not in use.|Correctly set the MFDI.| |EOF|Emergency Override FWD|The digital input terminal set to H1-xx AF [MFDI Function Selection Emergency Override FWD] activated.|When the emergency condition is gone, deactivate the digital input set to Emergency Override FWD.| |EOR|Emergency Override REV|The digital input terminal set to H1-xx B0 [MFDI Function Selection Emergency Override REV] activated.|When the emergency condition is gone, deactivate the digital input set to Emergency Override REV.| |EP24v|External Power 24V Supply|The voltage of the main circuit power supply decreased, and the 24 V power supply is supplying power to the drive.|• Examine the main circuit power supply.
    • Turn ON the main circuit power supply to run the drive.
    | |FDBKL|Feedback Loss Wire Break|The analog input from the terminal set to H3-xx B [MFAI Function Selection PID Feedback ] is more than 21 mA or less than 3 mA for longer than 1 s in these conditions:

    • b5-82 1 [Feedback Loss 4~20mA Detect Sel Alarm Only]
    • b5-01 ≠ 0 [PID Mode Setting ≠ Disabled]
    • H3-01 or H3-09 2 [Terminal A1/A2 Signal Level Selection 4 to 20 mA]
    |Make sure that you install the PID feedback source and it operates correctly.| |FLGT|Feedback Loss, Go To Freq b5-83|The analog input from the terminal set to H3-xx B [MFAI Function Selection PID Feedback ] is more than 21 mA or less than 3 mA for longer than 1 s in these conditions:

    • b5-82 3 [Feedback Loss 4~20mA Detect Sel Run At b5-83]
    • b5-01 ≠ 0 [PID Mode Setting ≠ Disabled]
    • H3-01 or H3-09 2 [Terminal A1/A2 Signal Level Selection 4 to 20 mA]
    |Make sure that you install the PID feedback source and it operates correctly.| |FR
    • The drive is not in PI Mode
    • The drive is running
    • Minimum Speed is enabled (Y1-06 > 0.00)
    • Y1-06 > Y4-12 [Thrust Frequency]
    |Increase the frequency reference to a value more than Y1-06.| |FR
    • The drive is not in PI Mode
    • The drive is running
    • Thrust is enabled (Y4-11 [Thrust Acceleration Time] > 0.00 and Y4-12 > Y1-06 [Minimum Speed])
    |Increase the frequency reference to a value more than Y4-12.| |HCA|High Current Alarm|The load is too heavy.|• Decrease the load for applications with repetitive starts and stops.
    • Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
    | |HIAUX|High PI Aux Feedback Level|PI Auxiliary Feedback is more than the level set in YF-12 [PI Aux Control High Level Detect] for the time set in YF-13 [PI Aux High Level Detection Time] in these conditions:

    • The drive operates in AUTO Mode.
    • The output frequency > 0.
    |• Decrease the PI Auxiliary Feedback level to less than YF-12.
    • Set YF-12 and YF-13 correctly.
    | |HIFB|High Feedback Sensed|The feedback level is more than the level set in Y1-11 [High Feedback Level].|• Decrease the feedback level to less than Y1-11 - Y1-14 [Hysteresis Level].
    • Set Y1-11 and Y1-12 correctly.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |INTLK|BAS Interlock|The digital input terminal set to H1-xx B2 [MFDI Function Selection BAS Interlock] deactivates.|Make sure the cause of interlock.| |L24v|Loss of External Power 24 Supply|The voltage of the backup 24 V power supply has decreased. The main circuit power supply is operating correctly.|• Examine the external 24 V power supply for disconnected wires and wiring errors and repair the problems.
    • Examine the external 24 V power supply for problems.
    | |LCP|Low City Pressure|Insufficient pressure is present on the inlet to the pump in these conditions:

    • Y4-24 0 [Low City Alarm Text Low City Pressure]
    • The terminal set for H1-xx B8 or 1B8 [MFDI Function Selection Low City Pressure or !Low City Pressure] activates
    |• Examine the pressure switch contact for correct operation.
    • Examine control wiring to drive terminal strip from pressure switch contact.
    • Make sure that suction pressure is present with an isolated measuring device.
    • Set Y4-22 [Low City On-Delay Time] and Y4-23 [Low City OffDelay Time] correctly.
    • Deactivate the digital input terminals set to H1-xx B8 or 1B8.
    | |LOAUX|Low PI Aux Feedback Level|When the drive operates in AUTO Mode or HAND Mode, PI Auxiliary Feedback is less than the level set in YF-09 [PI Aux Control Low Lvl Detection] for the time set in YF-10 [PI Aux Control Low Lvl Det Time] and the drive is running.|• Increase the PI Auxiliary Feedback level more than YF-09.
    • Set YF-09 and YF-10 correctly.
    | |LOFB|Low Feedback Sensed|The feedback level is less than the level set in Y1-08 [Low Feedback Level] for the time set in Y1-09 [Low Feedback Lvl Fault Dly Time].|• Increase the feedback level to more than Y1-08 + Y1-14 [High Feedback Hysteresis Level].
    • Set Y1-08 and Y1-09 correctly.
    | |LoG|Com Error / Abnormal SD Card|There is not a micro SD card in the keypad.|Put a micro SD card in the keypad.| |LOP|Loss of Prime|The drive used the method set in Y1-18 [Prime Loss Detection Method] to detect that the pump load is less than the level set in Y1-19 [Prime Loss Level] for the time set in Y1-20 [Prime Loss Time], and the output frequency is Y1-21 [Prime Loss Activation Freq] or more.|• Examine a dry well, air in the system, or no water in the system. Use preferred priming method suggested by the pump manufacturer to restart the pump.
    • When there is resistance in the pump, allow the system to pump water again.
    • Set Y1-18 to Y1-21 correctly.
    | |LSP|Low Suction Pressure|An external input has indicated that an insufficient suction pressure condition exists in these conditions:

    • Y4-24 1 [Low City Alarm Text Low Suction Pressure]
    • The terminal set for H1-xx B8 or 1B8 [MFDI Function Selection Low City Pressure or !Low City Pressure] activates
    |• Examine the pressure switch contact for correct operation.
    • Examine control wiring to drive terminal strip from pressure switch contact.
    • Make sure that suction pressure is present with an isolated measuring device.
    • Increase the system pressure.
    • Set Y4-22 [Low City On-Delay Time] and Y4-23 [Low City OffDelay Time] correctly.
    • Deactivate the digital input terminals set to H1-xx B8 or 1B8.
    | |LT-1|Cooling Fan Maintenance Time|The cooling fan is at 90% of its performance life estimate.|1. Replace the cooling fan.
    2. Set o4-03 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h] to reset the cooling fan operation time.
    | |LT-2|Capacitor Maintenance Time|The capacitors for the main circuit and control circuit are at 90% of their performance life estimate.|Replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |LT-3|SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime|The soft charge bypass relay is at 90% of its performance life estimate.|Replace the control board or the drive. For information about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |LT-4|IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)|The IGBT is at 50% of its performance life estimate.|Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency.| |LWT|Low Water In Tank|An external input has indicated that the water level in the tank is too low in these conditions:

    • Y4-24 2 [Low City Alarm Text Low Water in Tank]
    • The terminal set for H1-xx B8 or 1B8 [MFDI Function Selection Low City Pressure or !Low City Pressure] activates
    |• Examine the pressure switch contact for correct operation.
    • Examine control wiring to drive terminal strip from pressure switch contact.
    • Make sure that suction pressure is present with an isolated measuring device.
    • Increase the water level.
    • Set Y4-22 [Low City On-Delay Time] and Y4-23 [Low City OffDelay Time] correctly.
    • Deactivate the digital input terminals set to H1-xx B8 or 1B8.
    | |NETSC|NETSCAN Waiting for Master|The drive does not receive message from the master in the time set in Y9-28 [NETSCAN Alarm Time].|• Increase Y9-28 to account for network latency.
    • Make sure that there is a drive on the network with parameters set to Y1-01 3 [Multiplex Mode Memobus Network] and Y927 0 [Network Recovery Automatic].
    • Examine the network connections and the settings of H5-01 [Drive Node Address] and Y9-25 [Highest Node Address] for all drives on the network.
    | |NMS|Setpoint Not Met|The feedback deviates from the setpoint at a level more than Y1-15 [Maximum Setpoint Difference] for the time set in Y1-16 [Not Maintaining Setpoint Time].|• Examine for a blocked impeller, over cycling, or broken pipe.
    • Set Y1-15 and Y1-16 correctly.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |OD|Output Disconnect|The output circuit between the drive and the motor is open, and the drive output current is less than 5% of E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].|• Close the disconnected output circuit between the drive and the motor.
    • If you do not use a motor disconnect, set Y4-42 0 [Disabled].
    | |oH|Heatsink Overheat|The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink temperature is more than the L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].|• Measure the ambient temperature.
    • Increase the airflow around the drive.
    • Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to decrease the ambient temperature.
    • Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much heat.
    | |oH2|External Overheat (H1-XX=B)|An external device sent an oH2 alarm.|1. Find the external device that output the overheat alarm.
    2. Remove the cause of the problem.
    3. Clear the Overheat Alarm (oH2) [H1-xx B] in MFDI terminals S1 to S7.
    | |oH3|Motor Overheat (PTC Input)|The thermistor wiring that detects motor temperature is defective.|Correct wiring errors.| |oL3|Overtorque 1|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: The machine is locked.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |oL4|Overtorque 2|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: The machine is locked.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.|

    Page 125

    |oS|Overspeed|There is overshoot.|Decrease C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and increase C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1].| |ov|DC Bus Overvoltage|The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground (the current short to ground is charging the main circuit capacitor of the drive through the power supply).|1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
    2. Re-energize the drive.
    | |ov|DC Bus Overvoltage|The power supply voltage is too high.|Decrease the power supply voltage to align with the drive rated voltage.| |ov|DC Bus Overvoltage|Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction.|• Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring, and minimize the effects of noise.
    • Find the source of the noise. If a magnetic contactor is the source, use Surge Protective Device if necessary.
    • Set L5-01 ≠ 0 [Number of Auto-Restart Attempts ≠ 0 times].
    | |ovEr|Too Many Parameters Changed|You tried to change more than 150 parameters.|Make sure that parameters that do not have an effect on drive operation are at their default settings.

    Note:

    • You can change 150 parameters maximum.
    • If you change parameters that have dependencies, the drive can detect ovEr when the number of changed parameters is fewer than 150.
    | |PASS|Modbus Communication Test|The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications test is complete.|The PASS display will turn off after communications test mode is cleared.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|There is a phase loss in the drive input power.|Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|Loose wiring in the input power terminals.|Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.| |PF|Input Phase Loss|The drive input power voltage is changing too much.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    | |PF|Input Phase Loss|Unsatisfactory balance between voltage phases.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    • If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic contactor on the main circuit side for problems.
    | |PF|Input Phase Loss|The main circuit capacitors are unserviceable.|• Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance].
    • If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the capacitor. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
    | |PF|Input Phase Loss|The main circuit capacitors are unserviceable.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Re-energize the drive.
    • If the alarm stays, replace the circuit board or the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
    | |rUn|Motor Switch during Run|The drive received a Motor 2 Selection [H1-xx 16] during run.|Make sure that the drive receives the Motor 2 Selection while the drive is stopped.| |SAFE|Customer Safeties|External contact from customer wiring is open.|Examine the cause of the open safety.| |SE|Modbus Test Mode Error|MEMOBUS/Modbus communications selfdiagnostics [H1-xx 67] was done while the drive was running.|Stop the drive and do MEMOBUS/Modbus communications selfdiagnostics.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |STo|Safe Torque OFF|Safe Disable inputs H1-HC and H2-HC are open.|• Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an external source to terminal H1-HC and H2-HC.
    • When the Safe Disable function is not in use, use a jumper to connect terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.
    | |STo|Safe Torque OFF|There is internal damage to the two Safe Disable channels.|Replace the board or the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to replace the board.| |SToF|Safe Torque OFF Hardware|One of the two terminals H1-HC or H2-HC received the Safe Disable input signal.|• Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an external source to terminals H1-HC or H2-HC.
    • When the Safe Disable function is not in use, use a jumper to connect terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.
    | |SToF|Safe Torque OFF Hardware|The Safe Disable input signal is wired incorrectly.|• Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an external source to terminals H1-HC or H2-HC.
    • When the Safe Disable function is not in use, use a jumper to connect terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.
    | |SToF|Safe Torque OFF Hardware|There is internal damage to one Safe Disable channel.|Replace the board or the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to replace the board.| |TiM|Keypad Time Not Set|There is a battery in the keypad, but you have not set the date and time.|Use the keypad to set the date and time.| |TrPC|IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)|The IGBT is at 90% of its performance life estimate.|Replace the IGBT or the drive. For more information, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.| |UL3|Undertorque Detection 1|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: There is a broken pulley belt.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |UL4|Undertorque Detection 2|A fault occurred on the machine. Example: There is a broken pulley belt.|Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.| |UL6|Underload or Belt Break Detected|The output current decreased less than the motor underload curve set in L6-14 [Motor Underload Level @ Min Freq] for longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].|Examine parameters L6-13 [Motor Underload Curve Select] and L6-14.| |UL6|Underload or Belt Break Detected|The belt has broken disconnecting the motor from the load.|Examine parameters L6-13 [Motor Underload Curve Select] and L6-14.| |Uv|Undervoltage|The drive input power voltage is changing too much.|• Examine the input power for problems.
    • Make the drive input power stable.
    • If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic contactor on the main circuit side for problems.
    |

    ##### ◆ Parameter Setting Errors

    Parameter setting errors occur when multiple parameter settings do not agree, or when parameter setting values are not correct. Refer to the table in this section, examine the parameter setting that caused the error, and remove the cause of the error. You must first correct the parameter setting errors before you can operate the drive. The drive will not send notification signals for the faults and alarms when these parameter setting errors occur.

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |oPE01|Drive Capacity Setting Error|The value set in o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] does not agree with the drive model.|Set o2-04 to the correct value.| |oPE02|Parameter Range Setting Error|Parameters settings are not in the applicable setting range.|1. Push to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter], and find parameters that are not in the applicable setting range.
    2. Correct the parameter settings. Note:


    If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx errors have priority over oPE02.

    |

    Page 126

    |oPE03|Multi-Function Input Setting Err|The settings for these parameters do not agree:

    • H1-01 to H1-07 [Terminals S1 to S7 Function Selection]
    • H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Inputs 1 to 4]
    |Correct the parameter settings.| |oPE05|Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err|The setting to assign the Run command or frequency reference to an option card is incorrect.|Correct the parameter settings.| |oPE07|Analog Input Selection Error|The settings for H3-02 and H3-10 [MFAI Function Selection] and H7-30 [Virtual Analog Input Selection] overlap.|Set H3-02, H3-10, and H7-30 correctly to prevent overlap.

    Note:

    It is possible to set these functions to multiple analog input terminals at the same time:

    • Setting value 0 [Frequency Reference]
    • Setting values F and 1F [Not Used]
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |oPE08|Parameter Selection Error|You set a function that is not compatible with the control method set in A1-02 [Control Method Selection].|1. Push to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter], and find parameters that are not in the applicable setting range.
    2. Correct the parameter settings. Note:


    If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx errors have priority over oPE02.

    | |oPE09|PID Control Selection Fault|These parameters are set at the same time:

    • b5-01 = 1
    • b5-11 = 1 [PID Output Reverse Selection = Negative Output Accepted]


    And one of these parameters is set:

    • d2-02 ≠ 0.0 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit ≠ 0.0%]
    • Y1-06 ≠ 0.0 [Minimum Speed ≠ 0.0%]
    • Y4-12 ≠ 0.0 [Thrust Frequency ≠ 0.0%]
    • Y1-01 ≠ 0 [Multiplex Mode ≠ Drive Only]
    • YF-01≠ 0 [PI Aux Control Selection ≠ Disabled]
    |Correct the parameter settings.| |oPE10|V/f Data Setting Error|The parameters that set the V/f pattern do not satisfy these conditions:

    • For motor 1: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B Frequency ≤ Maximum Output Frequency]
    • For motor 2: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤ E3-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B Frequency ≤ Maximum Output Frequency]
    |Set the parameters correctly to satisfy the conditions.| |oPE11|Carrier Frequency Setting Error|These parameters are set at the same time:

    • C6-05 > 6 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain > 6]
    • C6-04 > C6-03 [Carrier Frequency Lower Limit > Carrier Frequency Upper Limit]


    Note: When C6-05 < 7, C6-04 becomes disabled. C603 stays active.|Set C6-02 to C6-05 correctly.| |oPE16|Energy Saving Constants Error|The Energy Saving parameters are not set in the applicable setting range.|Make sure that E5-xx is set correctly as specified by the motor nameplate data.| |oPE33|Digital Output Selection Error|These two parameters are set at the same time:

    • H2-60 ≠ F [Term M1-M2 Secondary Function ≠ Not Used]
    • H2-01 = 1xx [Term M1-M2 Function Selection = Inverse output of xx]
    |Clear the H2-01 to H2-03 = 1xx [Inverse output of xx] settings. Note: It is not possible to set H2-01 to H2-03 = 1xx [Inverse output of xx] when using output functions for logic operations (H2-60, H2-63, H2-66 ≠ F).| |oPE34|HAND/OFF/AUTO Input Setting|When S5-04 = 0 [HAND-OFF-AUTO Behavior = Legacy], H1-xx = 6D and 6E [MFDI Function Selection = AUTO Command and HAND Command] are set at the same time.|Set only one of the two functions H1-xx = 6D or 6E.| |oPE35|Network PI Aux Operation Mode|These parameter settings are not compatible:

    • Y9-50 ≠ 0 [PI Auxiliary Control Source ≠ Analog Only]
    • Y9-51 = 1 [PI Aux Control Turn-Off Method = Enabled]
    |Examine the settings for Y9-50 and Y9-51.|

    ##### ◆ Auto-Tuning Errors

    This table gives information about errors detected during Auto-Tuning. If the drive detects an Auto-Tuning error, the keypad will show the error and the motor will coast to stop. The drive will not send notification signals for faults and alarms when Auto-Tuning errors occur.

    Two types of Auto-Tuning errors are: Endx and Erx. Endx identifies that Auto-Tuning has successfully completed with calculation errors. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again, or set the motor parameters manually. You can use the drive in the application if you cannot find the cause of the Endx error. Erx identifies that Auto-Tuning was not successful. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again.

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |End1|Excessive Rated Voltage Setting|The torque reference was more than 20% during Auto-Tuning or the no-load current that was measured after Auto-Tuning is more than 80%.|• Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    • If you can uncouple the motor and load, remove the motor from the machine and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.
    • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, use the results from Auto-Tuning.
    | |End2|Iron Core Saturation Coefficient|The motor nameplate data entered during AutoTuning is incorrect.|• Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |End3|Rated Current Setting Alarm|The rated current value is incorrect.|Do Auto-Tuning again and set the correct rated current shown on the motor nameplate.| |End4|Adjusted Slip Calculation Error|The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range.|• Make sure the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Do Rotational Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, do Stationary AutoTuning 2.
    | |End5|Resistance Tuning Error|The Auto-Tuning results of the Line-to-Line Resistance were not in the applicable range.|• Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
    | |End6|Leakage Inductance Alarm|The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range.|Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and do Auto-Tuning again.| |End7|No-Load Current Alarm|The Auto-Tuning results of the motor no-load current value were not in the applicable range.|Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.| |End8|HFI Alarm|• Inductance saliency ratio (E5-07/E5-06) is too small.
    • The drive cannot find the n8-36 [HFI Frequency Level for L Tuning] value.
    |• Set the correct value on the motor nameplate to E5-xx [PM Motor Settings] or do rotational/stationary Auto-Tuning.
    • When it is necessary to set n8-35 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method High Frequency Injection], make sure that there is no unusual noise in the low speed range (10% or less) and that the motor does not rotate in reverse at start.


    Note: If the drive detects End8, it will automatically set n8-35 =0 [Pull-in]. Do not change the settings unless necessary.| |End9|Initial Pole Detection Alarm|The drive cannot calculate the correct value for n8-84 [Polarity Detection Current] during High Frequency Injection Tuning.|When n8-35 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method High Frequency Injection], make sure that the motor does not rotate in reverse at start.

    Note: If the drive detects End9, it will automatically set n8-35 =0 [Pull-in]. Do not change the settings unless necessary.| |Er-01|Motor Data Error|The motor nameplate data entered during AutoTuning is incorrect.|• Make sure that the motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |Er-02|Drive in an Alarm State|The motor nameplate data entered during AutoTuning is incorrect.|• Make sure that the motor nameplate data entered in Auto-Tuning is correct.
    • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |Er-03|OFF Button was Pressed|You pushed during Auto-Tuning.

    |Auto-Tuning did not complete correctly. Do Auto-Tuning again.| |Er-04|Line-to-Line Resistance Error|The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range.|• Examine and repair motor wiring.
    • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational AutoTuning again.
    | |Er-05|No-Load Current Error|The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range.|• Examine and repair motor wiring.
    • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational AutoTuning again.
    | |Er-08|Rated Slip Error|The motor nameplate data entered during AutoTuning is incorrect.|• Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |Er-09|Acceleration Error|The motor did not accelerate for the specified acceleration time.|1. Increase the value set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1].
    2. Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.
    | |Er-12|Current Detection Error|There is a phase loss in the drive input power. (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)|Examine and repair motor wiring.| |Er-13|Leakage Inductance Error|The motor rated current value is incorrect.|Correctly set the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate and do Auto-Tuning again.| |Er-18|Back EMF Error|The result of the induced voltage tuning was not in the applicable range.|1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    |

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |Er-19|PM Inductance Error|The Auto-Tuning results of the PM motor inductance were not in the applicable range.|1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |Er-20|Stator Resistance Error|The Auto-Tuning results of the PM Motor Stator Resistance were not in the applicable range.|1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
    2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data.
    | |Er-25|HighFreq Inject Param Tuning Err|The motor data is incorrect.|Do Stationary Auto-Tuning again.

    Note:

    If the drive detects Er-25 after you do Stationary Auto-Tuning, it is possible that the motor cannot use high frequency injection. For more information, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.|

    ##### ◆ Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors

    ##### ■ Operating Mode Display

    When you use the backup function from the keypad, the keypad will show messages related to the current operation. These messages will not identify errors in the drive operation.

    |Keypad Display|Name|Display|State| |---|---|---|---| |Drive and Keypad mismatch. Should the parameters be restored?|Detection of inconsistency between the drive and keypad|Normally displayed|The drive detected the connection of a keypad from a different drive. Select [Yes] to copy parameters backed up in the keypad to the connected drive.| |Restore Restore from keypad|Restoring parameters|Flashing|The parameters stored in the keypad have been restored to the drive.| |End|Backup/restore/verify operation ended normally|Normally displayed|The parameter backup, restore, or verify operation ended normally.| |Backup Backup from Drive|Backing up parameters|Flashing|The parameters stored in the drive are being backed up to the keypad.| |Verify Keypad & Drive|Verifying parameters|Flashing|The parameter settings stored in the keypad and the parameter settings in the drive align or are being compared.|

    ###### ■ Backup Function Runtime ErrorsWhen an error occurs, the keypad shows a code to identify the error.The table in this section shows the error codes. Refer to this table to remove the cause of the errors.

    Note: Push any key on the keypad to clear an error.

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |CPEr|Control Mode Mismatch|The keypad setting and drive setting for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] do not agree.|1. Set A1-02 on the drive to the same value that is on the keypad.
    2. Restore the parameters.
    | |CPyE|Error Writing Data|Parameter restore did not end correctly.|Restore the parameters.| |CSEr|Control Mode Mismatch|The keypad is broken.|Replace the keypad.| |dFPS|Drive Model Mismatch|You tried to restore parameters to a different drive model than the one that you backed up.|1. Examine the drive model that you used to back up the parameters.
    2. Restore the parameters.
    | |iFEr|Keypad Communication Error|There was a communications error between the keypad and the drive.|Examine the connector or cable connection.| |ndAT|Error Received Data|The parameter settings for model and specifications (power supply voltage and capacity) are different between the keypad and the drive.|1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
    2. Restore the parameters.
    | |ndAT|Error Received Data|The parameters are not stored in the keypad.|1. Connect a keypad that has the correct parameters.
    2. Restore the parameters.
    | |PWEr|DWEZ Password Mismatch|The password set in the backup operation with qx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameters] and rx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Connections] is incorrect.|Set the DWEZ PC software password supplied by Yaskawa for the DWEZ program user ID downloaded to the drive.|

    |Code|Name|Causes|Possible Solutions| |---|---|---|---| |rdEr|Error Reading Data|You tried to back up the data when o3-02 0 [Copy Allowed Selection = Disabled].|Set o3-02 1 [Enabled] and back up again.| |vAEr|Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch|The power supply specifications or drive capacity parameter settings are different between the keypad and the drive.|1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
    2. Restore the parameters.
    | |vFyE|Parameters do not Match|The parameters that are backed up in the keypad and the parameters in the drive are not the same.|1. Restore or backup the parameter again.
    2. Verify the parameters.
    |

    ######### Revision History

    |Date of Publication|Revision Number|Section|Revised Content| |---|---|---|---| |February 2024|6|All|Revision:

    • Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.
    • Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01018. Addition: Information on models 2143, 2169, 4156 (IP55/ULType 12)
    | |October 2022|5|All|Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.| |October 2022|5|17|Addition: Seismic Standards| |October 2022|5|-|Format revision: Changed the design of front cover and back cover.| |March 2020|4|All|Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.| |December 2019|3|All|Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.| |November 2019|2|All|Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.| |August 2019|1|All|Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.| |March 2019|-|-|First Edition|

    ##### HV600 DRIVE INSTALLATION & PRIMARY OPERATION

    YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. 2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.

    +1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) www.yaskawa.com

    DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT) 2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan Phone: +81-930-25-2548 www.yaskawa.co.jp

    YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH Philipp-Reis-Str. 6, 65795 Hattersheim am Main, Germany Phone: +49-6196-569-300 E-mail: support@yaskawa.eu.com www.yaskawa.eu.com

    YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA. 777, Avenida Piraporinha, Diadema, São Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil Phone: +55-11-3585-1100 www.yaskawa.com.br

    In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply. Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements. Original instructions. © 2019 YASKAWA Electric Corporation

    TOEPC71061732 Revision: G <6>-0 February 2024 Published in Japan

    23-2-25_YAI*TOEPC71061732*

    More from Yaskawa

    Similar Unknown